XI-JEE M-3 Physics Final

Vedantu’s
Vedantu’s Tatva
Vedantu’s Tatva Practice
TatvaPractice
Practice Book | Book
Book| Biology
Physics - Vol.
- Vol. 2 !
Physics
Genetics
Evolution
and
Volume 3 Class 11 JEE
Class 11 JEE
SCAN
SCAN CODE
SCAN CODE
CODE
to know
know how
to know
to how to
how to
to
use
use this
use this Book
this Book
Book
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectiﬁed in upcoming editions.
Printed by
LASERPRINTS
Quality - Ethics - Service
H-4 (a), Electronic Complex, Road No.1 IPIA, Kota
(Rajasthan) INDIA
Phones : 0744-2436941Mobile : 9829037941
*Mail ID : laserpr@gmail.com, laser1prints@gmail.com
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
Units and Measurements & Basic Mathematics
Motion in a Straight line
Motion in a Plane & Relative Motion
Laws of Motion & Friction
VOLUME 2:
Work, Energy and Power
Circular Motion
Centre of Mass, Momentum and Collision
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Mechanical Properties of Solids
Fluid Mechanics
Simple Harmonic Motion
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 07
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 16
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 21
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 25
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 29
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 162
FLUID MECHANICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 32
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 164

5
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 80
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 167
WAVES
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 118
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 169

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 6
10
SCAN CODE
Chapter 10
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 1.2 Important Points on Elastic Behaviour of Solids

1.1 Introduction
 An elastic body is one that regains its original shape
 What happens to a rubber band when you stretch it
and size when deforming forces are removed
and let go?
 A plastic body is one that succumbs to deforming forces
 It deforms but regains its original form when you stop
applying a force. (however small) and cannot return to its original shape
and size
 But say, you take an aluminium rod and try to bend it
using your arm strength. You somehow do manage to  Elasticity is the property of a body to regain its original
bend it a little and then stop applying force. Does the shape and size when deforming forces are removed. It
rod regain its original shape? Of course not. exhibits an opposition to change.
1.3 Rigid body
A body whose size and shape cannot be changed however
large the applied force may be known as a rigid body.
1.4 Deforming Force and Restoring Force
 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body

which tends to change the size or shape of the body.
 Under the action of deforming force, a body opposes
any change in its shape and size due to the net effect of
internal (molecular) forces. The resulting force which
opposes the deformation is known as restoring force.
Fig. 10.1
 This difference in the behaviour of the material is based 2. STRESS AND STRAIN
on their elastic and plastic nature.
2.1 Stress
 Looking at the elasticity in the atomic level, solids are
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
made of atoms (or molecules). They are surrounded by
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven
other such atoms which are held in a state of equilibrium heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an
by interatomic forces. accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and
 When an external force is applied these particles are fluid behaviour.
displaced, resulting in the deformation of the solid. Stress is given by the following formula:
 When the application of the deforming force is stopped,
interatomic forces drive the atoms to regain their state F

of equilibrium. A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
 The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
is perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to
applied.
groom yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends
to deform after prolonged use. After a point, it may The unit of stress is N/m2
snap as well. This is because the hair tie eventually
loses its elastic nature.
SCAN CODE
2.2 Types of Stress 2.4 Types of Strain

Tensile Stress Strain experienced by a body can be of two types depending
on stress application as follows:
 Tensile stress is the force applied per unit area,
increasing the length of body (or area). Tensile Strain
 Objects under tensile stress become thinner and longer.  Tensile strain is the change in length (or area) of a
body due to the application of tensile stress.
Compressive Stress
Compressive Strain
 Compressive stress is the force applied per unit area,
which decreases the length (or area) of a body.  Compressive Strain is the change in length (or area)
of a body due to the application of compressive
 The object under compressive stress becomes thicker strain.
and shorter.
Shear Strain or Tangential Strain
Shear Stress or Tangential Stress
 Tangential strain is Ratio of relative displacement to
 Shear stress, often denoted by T, is the component its original distance in short the applied force
of stress coplanar with a material cross section. It tangentially is itself the tangential stress and the
arises from the shear force, the component of force effect seen is the tangential strain.
vector parallel to the material cross section.
2.5 Hooke’s Law
2.3 Strain
 Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
body in the direction of force applied, divided by the limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the
initial dimensions of the body. resulting strain.
 The following equation gives the relation for i.e. stress  strain.
deformation in terms of the length of a solid:
l stress
 The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity.
L strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the
change in length and L is the original length of the  According to various types of stresses, we have
material. corresponding modulii of elasticity.
 The strain is a dimensionless quantity as it just defines  Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of
the relative change in shape. stress
3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY
3.1 Stress, Strain and Various Elastic Moduli
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
FL
Longitudinal (Tensile or compressive) Two equal and opposite Elongation or Y Young’s Solid
AL
forces perpendicular to compression modulus
opposite faces (L/L)
= F/A)
SCAN CODE
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
x FL
Shearing Two equal and opposite tan   G Shear modulus Solid
L A.x
forces parallel to
opposite surfaces
( = F/A)
 PV
Hydraulic/volume Forces perpendicular Volume change B Bulk modulus Solid, liquid
V
everywhere to the (V/V) and gas
surface, force per unit
area (pressure) same
everywhere.
3.2 Poisson’s Ratio

4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
then not only its length changes but its transverse
When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
Fig. 10.2 1
= (stress) (strain)
2
b
Transverse or lateral strain is
b
1 2
= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as 2
Poisson’s ratio, .
2
b / b 1  stress 
 =
 /  2 modulus of elasticity
transverse strain
Since,    In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)
longitudinal strain
Negative sign is introduced to make  a positive quantity. 2
Since, an increase in length always results in a decrease in Energy stored 1  Δ 
= Y 
transverse dimensions and vice-versa. volume 2   
Note:
1 YA 2 1
(1)  has no units, as its a ratio of similar quantities Total energy = .  Δ  = F Δ
2  2
(2) 0    0.5
SCAN CODE
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH (d) If the stress is increased further,
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended  A very small increase in stress produces a very large
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and increase in strain (region AB).
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
 After reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum

stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to
flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength.
 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of

the material of wire.
 Stress-strain curve for different materials.

Elastic Hysteresis :
The strain persists even when the stress is removed. This
lagging behind of strain is called elastic hysteresis. This
Fig. 10.3 is the reason why the values of strain for same stress are
(a) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) different while increasing the load and while decreasing the
load.
 Stress is proportional to strain.
 Hooke’s law is obeyed.
 The point P is called limit of proportionality.
 Slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus of the
material of the wire. Y = tan .
Note:
Elastic limit. The maximum value of the stress within
which the body regains its original shape and size.
Fig. 10.4
(b) If the strain is increased a little bit (i.e., in the region PE)
Brittle material
 The stress is not proportional to strain.
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material
 The wire still regains its original length after the removal
and it will break soon after the elastic limit is crossed.
of stretching force.
 Point E is known as elastic limit or yield–point.
 The region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the
material of wire.
 Yield point is the stress beyond which the material
becomes plastic.
(c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E (i.e.,
between EA)
 The strain increases much more rapidly
 If the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
back to its natural length. Some permanent increase in length
takes place.
Fig. 10.5
SCAN CODE
Ductile material Aim

The material of the wire have a good plastic range and such To determine Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material
materials can be easily changed into different shapes and of a given wire.
can be drawn into thin wires. Materials Required
 Searle’s apparatus
 Two long steel wires of same length and diameter
 A metre scale
 A screw gauge
 Eight 0.5 kg slotted weights
 1 kg hanger
Theory
The normal stress for a wire with length L and radius r is
loaded with weight Mg where  is the increase in length,
then normal stress is given as:
Mg
Normal Stess =
Fig. 10.6 r 2
Elastomers
1
Stress strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic Longitudinal Strain =
L
limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger than
Hence, Young’s Modulus =
the stress applied. Such materials have no plastic range and
the breaking point lies very close to elastic limit. eg. rubber.
Mg
Normal Stress 2 MgL
Y  r  Y  2
Longitudinal Strain  r 
L
Y can be calculated as the values of L and r are known and

l is found by known Mg value.
Fig. 10.7
6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

6.1 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s
method
Searle’s apparatus is used for the measurement of Young’s
modulus. It consists of two equal length wires that are
attached to a rigid support. To understand how Searle’s
apparatus is used to determine Young’s modulus of
elasticity of the material of a given wire, read the below
experiment.
Fig. 10.8
SCAN CODE
6.2 Rods as springs and their combination 6.3 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
Analogy of Rod as a spring
stress
Y
strain
AY
or F  

Fig. 10.12
Consider a small element of length dx at a distance x from
the axis of rotation
m
Mass of the element, dm  dx  dx
L
Fig. 10.9
m
AY where  
= constant, depends on type of material and geometry L

The centripetal force acting on the element is
of rod. F  k
AY T dx 2 2
where k  dl    L – x 2  dx [Using (i)]

= equivalent spring constant. YA 2YA 
So the total elongation of the whole rod is
1 2
l  L – x 2  dx
0 2YA  2
L
2  2 x3  1 2 L3 1 m2 L2
  L x –   
2YA  3  0 3 YA 3 YA
6.4 Stress in accelerated linear objects
Under the action of the external force, the rod acceleration
with a = F/m. The magnitude of stress decreases as one
Fig. 10.10 moves away from the point of application of the force.
for the system of rods shown in figure (a), the replaced
Therefore, the strain also decreases as one moves towards
spring system is shown in figure (b) two spring in series.
the free end.
Figure (c) represents equivalent spring system. Figure (d)
d determine the total elongation of the rod, let us consider
represents another combination of rods and their replaced
a small element of length dx at a distance x fro the free end
spring system.
of the rod. The magnitude of force at this section is
F  Fx L . Therefore, the stress at this section is
F F x
  
A A L
and elongation d produced in this differential element is
F
Fig. 10.11 d  xdx
YAL
SCAN CODE
Thus, total elongation is  A spring will be better one, if a large restoring force is
set up in it on being deformed, which in turn depends
l
F l F  x2  upon the elasticity of the material of the spring. Since
 xdx 
YAL 0
  the Young’s modulus of elasticity of steel is more than
YAL  2  0
that of copper, hence steel is preferred in making the
springs.
1 Fl
or  
2 YA  A bridge during its use undergoes alternating stresses
and strains for a large number of times each day,
7. INTERESTING POINTS TO KNOW depending upon the movement of vehicles on it. When
a bridge is used for long time, it loses its elastic strength.
 Consider two rods of rubber and steel each of length l Therefore, the amount of strain in the bridge for a given
and area of cross section a. Let Yr, Ys be the Young’s stress will become large and ultimately, the bridge may
modulus of elasticity of rubber and steel respectively. collapse. That is why the bridges are declared unsafe
When a stretching force F is applied on each rod, let lr, after long use.
ls be the extension in the rubber rod and steel rod
respectivley; where lr > ls  The work done in stretching the wire is stored in it in the
form of the elastic potential energy.
F F 
Then, Yr  and Ys 
a  r a  s
Ys  r
 Y   > 1 i.e. Ys > Yr
r s
Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.
SCAN CODE
SUMMARY
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY

The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material is Young’s Modulus
perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to groom FL
yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends to deform Y
AL
after prolonged use. After a point, it may snap as well. This Shear Modulus
is because the hair tie eventually loses its elastic nature.
FL
G
A.x
2. STRESS AND STRAIN Bulk Modulus
 PV
Stress B
V
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven Poisson’s Ratio
heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and then not only its length changes but its transverse
fluid behaviour.
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
Stress is given by the following formula: or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
F

A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
applied.
Strain b
Transverse or lateral strain is
Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the body b
in the direction of force applied, divided by the initial The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as
dimensions of the body.
Poisson’s ratio, .
The following equation gives the relation for deformation
b / b
in terms of the length of a solid: 
l  / 

L transverse strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the change Since, 
longitrdinal strain
in length and L is the original length of the material.
Hooke’s Law
4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
resulting strain. applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
i.e. stress  strain. and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
stress
The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity. We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
strain
According to various types of stresses, we have 1

= (stress) (strain)
corresponding modulii of elasticity. 2
Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of stress
SCAN CODE
1 2 6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
2
2
 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s method
1  stress 
=  Rods as springs and their combination
2 modulus of elasticity
 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)  Stress in accelerated linear objects
2
Energy stored 1  Δ 
= Y 
volume 2   
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
SCAN CODE
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Elastic behaviour of Solids & Stress and Strain 8. A wire of cross section A is stretched horizontally between
1. The force constant of a wire does not depend on two clamps located 2 metres apart. A weight W kg is
(a) Nature of the material (b) Radius of the wire Suspended from the mid-point of the wire. If the mid-point
sags vertically through a distance x < 1 the strain produced
(c) Length of the wire (d) none of these
is:
2. The ratio of radii of two wires of same material is 2 : 1.
Stretched by same force, then the ratio of stress is 2x 2 x2
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 x2
(c) (d) None of these
3. The length of a wire is increased by 1 mm on the application 2 2
of a given load. In a wire of the same material, but of length 9. A wire elongates by l mm when a load w is hung from it. If
and radius twice that of the first, on application of the same the wire goes over a pulley and two weights w each are
load, extension is hung at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm (in mm)
(c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm (a) l (b) 2 l
4. If equal and opposite forces applied to a body tend to (c) zero (d) l/2
elongate it, the stress so produced is called
10. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before breaking. If
(a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress the wire is cut into two equal parts, each part can sustain a
(c) Tangential stress (d) Working stress weight of
5. The longitudinal extension of any elastic material is very (a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg
small. In order to have an appreciable change, the material
(c) 40 kg (d) 35 kg
must be in the form of
(a) Long thick wire (b) Short thick wire 11. Two wires of the same material and same mass are stretched
by the same force. Their lengths are in the ratio 2 : 3. Their
(c) Long thin wire (d) Short thin wire
elongations are in the ratio
6. The reason for the change in shape of a regular body is
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(a) Volume stress (b) Shearing strain
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
(c) Longitudinal strain (d) Metallic strain
12. A rubber ball is taken to a depth of 200 m in a pool. Its
7. One end of a uniform rod of mass m1 and cross-sectional
volume decreases by 0.1%. If the density of the water
area A is hung from a ceiling. The other end of the bar is 3 3 2
is 1 × 10 kg/m and g = 10 m/s , then the volume elasticity
supporting mass m2. The stress at the midpoint is 2
(Bulk modulus) in N/m will be
8 8
(a) 10 (b) 2 × 10
9 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 10
–5
13. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit
atmospheric pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cubic
centimetre of water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere
will be
–5
(a) 0.4 cc (b) 4 × 10 cc
g m 2  2m1  g m 2  m1  (c) 0.025 cc (d) 0.004 cc
(a) (b)
2A 2A
14. A steel wire of diameter 2 mm has a breaking strength of 4
5
g  m 2  m1  × 10 N. The breaking of similar steel wire of diameter 1
g 2m 2  m1  5
(c) (d) mm will be n × 10 N; where n is
2A 3A
9 –2
15. The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . The 20. Two wires are made of the same material and have the
–3 –1
density of the metal is 7800 kg m . If g = 10 N kg , Find same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A
the maximum length of the wire (in km) made of this metal and wire-2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of
which may be suspended without breaking. wire-1 increases by x on applying force 1 N, how much
16. To break a wire of one-meter length, minimum weight of force (in N) is needed to stretch wire 2 by the same amount?
40 kg wt is required. Then the wire of same material of 21. A cylindrical eraser which is attached at the back of a light
double radius and 6 m length will require a breaking weight pencil, of negligible mass is dragged across a paper at a
(in kg-wt) constant velocity to the right by its pencil. The coefficient
of kinetic friction between eraser and paper is 0.6. The
17. Two opposite forces F1  120 N and F2  80 N on an
pencil pushes down with 5N. The height of the eraser is 2
2
elastic plank of modulus of elasticity Y  2  1011 N m 2 cm and its circular area is 4 cm . its top surface is displaced
horizontally 0.6 mm relative to the bottom. If the shear
and length l  1 placed over a smooth horizontal surface.
modulus of the eraser material is x  105 Pa, Find value of
The cross-sectional area of the plank is S  0.5m 2 . The
2x.
change in length of the plank is n  10 –9 m. Find the value
Moduli of Elasticity
of n. 10 2
22. Young’s modulus of brass and steel are 10 × 10 N/m
11 2
and 2 × 10 N/m , respectively. A brass wire and a steel
wire of the same length are extended by 1 mm under the
same force. The radii of the brass and steel wires are RB
and RS respectively. Then
R
(a) RS = 2 RB (b) R S  2B
R
18. A light rod of length 2m is suspended from the ceiling (c) RS = 4RB (d) R S  4B
horizontally by means of two vertical wires of equal 23. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a
lengths. A weight W is hung from the light rod as shown. metal wire going over a smooth pulley as shown. The
The rod is hung by means of a steel wire of cross-sectional
40
area A1  0.1cm 2 and brass wire of cross-sectional area breaking stress of the metal is 3  106 N / m 2 . If g = 10 m/
2
A 2  0.2 cm 2 . To have equal stress in both wires, ratio of s , then what should be the minimum radius of the wire
used if it is not to break?
tension T1 T2 =
(a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

(c) 1.5 mm (d) 2 mm
19. Two wires are made of the same material and have the 24. Four identical cylindrical columns of steel support a big
same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of
and wire 2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of each column are 30 cm and 40 cm respectively. Assume the
wire 1 increases by x on applying force F, the force load distribution to be uniform, calculate the compressional
needed to stretch wire 2 by equal amount (or elongation) strain of each column. The Young’s modulus of steel is
11
is nF, where n is: 2.0 × 10 Pa.
–7 –7
(a) 2.785 × 10 (b) 1.785 × 10
–7 –8
(c) 3.785 × 10 (d) 2.785 × 10
25. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and

 4MLg 
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin 29. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2 
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the
arrangement is stretched by applying forces at two ends, by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
the ratio of the elongation in the thin wire to that in the
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
thick wire is
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 micrometer, repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100.
6 2
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y
26. A cylindrical tree has a breaking stress of 10 N/m . The measurement is
maximum possible height of the tree is 5 m. the density of (a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are
2
material of the tree is (take g = 10 m/s ) the same
3 3 4 3
(a) 10 kg/m (b) 10 kg/m (b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
4 3 3 due to the error in the measurement of l.
(c) 2 × 10 kg/m (d) 1 kg/m
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
27. You are given three wires A, B and C of the same length due to the error in the measurement of d.
and cross section. They are each stretched by applying the (d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
same force to the ends. The wire A is stretched least and that due to the error in the measurement of l.
comes back to its original length when the stretching force 30. A 0.05 m cube has its upper face displaced by 0.2 cm by a
is removed. The wire B is stretched more than A and also tangential force of 8 N. Calculate the modulus of rigidity
4 –2
comes back to its original length when the stretching force (in 10 Nm ) of the material of the cube.
3
is removed. The wire C is stretched most and remains 31. A hydraulic press contains 0.25 m (250 L) of oil. Find the
stretched even when stretching force is removed. The decrease in volume of he oil ( in %) when it is subjected to
greatest Young’s modulus of elasticity is possessed by the a pressure increase p  1.6  107 Pa . The bulk modulus
material of wire
of the oil is B  5.0  109 Pa :
(a) A
32. A solid sphere of radius R made of material of bulk
(b) B modulus B is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
(c) C container. A massless piston of area A (the area of container
is also A) floats on he surface of the liquid. When a mass
(d) All have the same elasticity M is placed on the piston to compress the liquid, find the
28. The face EFGH of the cube shown in the figure is displaced fractional change in radius of the sphere.
5
2 mm parallel to itself when forces of 5 × 10 N each are Mg
applied on the lower and upper faces. The lower face is (Given  0.3 )
AB
fixed. The strain produced in the cube is Elastic Potential Energy
33. If the potential energy of a spring is V on stretching it by 2
cm, then its potential energy when it is stretched by 10
cm will be
(a) V/25 (b) 5V
(c) V/5 (d) 25V
34. Two wires of the same material and length but diameters
in the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force. The
potential energy per unit volume for the two wires when
stretched will be in the ratio
(a) 2 (b) 0.5
(a) 16 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
8
(c) 0.05 (d) 1.2 × 10 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
35. If S is stress and Y is Young’s modulus of material of a 42. When the thin smooth wire of cross-sectional area A and
wire, the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is Young’s modulus Y, density  and length l is pulled with
S2 2 a 2 l 3 A
(a) 2 S Y
2
(b) an acceleration a the elastic energy stored is .
2Y xY
Find x
2Y S
(c) 2 (d) 2 Y
S
36. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length  by

applying a force F. The work done in stretching is : 43. A rubber cord has a cross-sectional area 1 mm2 and total
unstretched length 10.0 cm. It is stretched to 12.0 cm and
F then released to project a missile of mass 5.0 g. Taking
(a) (b) F
2 Young’s modulus Y for rubber as 5.0 × 108 N/m2.
Calculate the velocity (in m/s) of projection.
F
(c) 2F (d) Stress-Strain Graph
2
37. What amount of work is done in increasing the length of a 44. The stress versus strain graphs for wires of two materials
wire through unity? A and B are as shown in the figure. If YA and YB are the
Young’s modulii of the materials, then
YL YL2
(a) 2A (b)
2A
YA YL
(c) 2L (d) A
38. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5

kg wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The
work done during the extension of wire is
(a) 0.16 J (b) 0.016 J
(c) 1.6 J (d) 16 J (a) YB = 2YA (b) YA = YB
39. Two wires of same diameter of the same material having (c) YB = 3YA (d) YA = 3YB
the length  and 2. If the force F is applied on each, the
ratio of the work done in the two wires will be 45. The strain stress curves of three wires of different materials
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4 are shown in the figure. P, Q and R are the elastic limits of
the wires. The figure shows that
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
40. A wire suspended vertically from one of its ends is stretched
by attaching a weight of 200 N to the lower end. The weight
stretches the wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic energy stored
in the wire is :
(a) 0.2 J (b) 10 J
(c) 20 J (d) 0.1 J
41. An iron ball (solid sphere) of radius R is placed in a gas
chamber in which the pressure is maintained at 2P0. The
increase in elastic potential energy stored in the ball is
R 3 P02 x (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum

, where
y is a proper fraction, find 
x  y . (b) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
y
(c) Elasticity of R is maximum
[P0 is atmospheric pressure;  is bulk modulus of iron]
(d) None of the above is true
46. The figure shows the stress-strain graph of a certain 50. A sphere of radius 0.1 m and mass 8 kg is attached to the
substance. Over which region of the graph is Hooke’s law lower end of a steel wire of length 5m and diameter 10
–3
obeyed m. The wire is suspended from 5.22 m high ceiling of a

room. When the sphere is made to swing as a simple
pendulum, it just grazes the floor at its lowest point. young’s
11 –2
modulus of steel is 2 × 10 Nm . Find the velocity of the
2
sphere at the lowest position in m/s. (Given: g = 10m/s ):
2 2
E 51. A horizontal oriented copper rod of length   m is
3
(a) AB (b) BC rotated about a vertical axis passing through its middle.
(c) CD (d) ED Breaking strength of copper is   2.5  108 Pa and density
47. The stress-strain curves for brass, steel and rubber are of copper p  9  103 Kg m3 . Rotation frequency
shown in the figure. The lines A, B and C are for –1
measured (in sec ) at which the rod ruptures is given by
50 n, where n is equal to:
52. A uniform circular ring of radius R = 2.5 cm and mass 10
gm is made of an elastic material. Symmetrical radially
outward forces are applied on the ring to increase its radius
from R = 2.5 cm to 2.7 cm. young’s modulus of material
11 N
(a) Rubber, brass and steel respectively of the ring is 2  10 and radius of cross section of
m2
(b) Brass, steel and rubber the ring is 1 mm. If all the external forces are removed,
(c) Steel, brass and rubber respectively how long will it take for the ring to come to its original
(d) Steel, rubber and brass radius for the first time? (in milliseconds)
2
48. Which one of the following is the Young’s modulus (in N/m ) 53. If stress in a stretched wire of a material (whose Young’s
for the wire having the stress-strain curve shown in the Y
figure modulus is Y) is , in order that the speed of
200
longitudinal waves is equal to 10 times the speed of
transverse waves, then find the value of  ?
54. The elastic limit of a steel cable is 3.0 × 108 N/m2 and the
cross-section is 4 cm2. Find the maximum upward
acceleration that can be given to a 900 kg elevator
supported by the cable if the stress is not to exceed one
11 11 third of the elastic limit. (take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) 24 × 10 (b) 8.0 × 10
(c) 10 × 10
11
(d) 2.0 × 10
11 (Answer should be correct up to two decimal places)
Miscellaneous Cases in Elasticity 55. A lift is tied with thick wires and the mass of the lift is 1000
49. The length of a steel cylinder is kept constant by applying kg. If the maximum acceleration of the lift is 1ms–2 and the
pressure at its two ends. When the temperature of rod is maximum stress the wire can bear is 1.4 × 106 Nm–2. If g = 10
increased by 100°C from its initial temperature, the increase ms–2 the minimum diameter of that wire is (in meters)?
in pressure to be applied at its ends is
11 2 –6 5
(Ysteel = 2 × 10 N/m , steel = 11 × 10 /°C, 1 atm = 10 N/
2
m)
7 3
(a) 22 × 10 atm (b) 2.2 × 10 atm
3
(c) zero (d) 4.3 × 10 atm
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are
deleted from JEE Main
1. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion 4. The length of metallic wire is  1 when tension in it is T1 . It
A and the other is labelled as Reason R
Assertion (A): When a rod lying freely is heated, no thermal is  2 when the tension is T2 . The original length of the
stress is developed in it. wire will be (Assume that Hooke’s law is valid) (2021)
Reason (R): On heating, the length of the rod increases.
T2 1  T1 2 1   2
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct (a) (b)
T2  T1 2
answer from the option given below: (2021)
(a) A is false but R is true
T11  T2  2 T2 1  T2  2
(b) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation (c) (d)
T2  T1 T1  T2
of A
(c) A is true but R is false 5. An object is located at 2 km beneath the surface of the
(d) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct
V
explanation of A water. If the fractional compression is 1.36%, the ratio
V
2. If Y, K and  are the values of Young’s modulus, bulk
of hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain
modulus and modulus of rigidity of any material
will be _____.
respectively. Choose the correct relation for these
parameters. (2021) [Given : density of water is 1000kg / m 3 and g  9.8m / s 2
(2021)
9K 9K
(a) Y   N / m2 (b) Y   N / m2
(a) 1.96 10 N / m
7 2 (b) 1.44 10 N / m
7 2
3K   2  3K
(c) 2.26 109 N / m 2 (d) 1.44 109 N / m2
Y 3YK
(c) K   N / m2 (d)    N / m2 6. A uniform metallic wire is elongated by 0.04 m when
9  3Y 9K  Y
subjected to a linear force F. The elongation, if its length
3. The normal density of a material is  and its bulk modulus and diameter is doubled and subjected to the same force
of elasticity if K. The magnitude of increase in density of will be ___cm. (2021)
material, when a pressure P is applied uniformly on all sides, 7. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2mm and
will be : (2021) 4mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of
2N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same material
PK K
(a) (b) and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of wire
 P
A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of a:b.
K P a 1
(c) p (d) can be expressed as where x is ..... (2021)
K b x
8. The bulk modulus of liquid is 3  1010 Nm 2 . The 14. The elastic behaviour of material for linear stress and
pressure required to reduce the volume of liquid by 2% linear strain, in the figure. The energy density for a
is (JEE Main 2022) linear strain of 5  10 4 is ______ kJ m3 . Assume that
8 2
(a) 3  10 Nm (b) 9  108 Nm 2 material is elastic upto the linear strain of 5  10 4.
(c) 6  108 Nm 2 (d) 12  108 Nm 2 (JEE Main 2022)
9. The area of cross section of the rope used to lift a load
by a crane is 2.5  104 m 2 . The maximum lifting
capacity of the crane is 10 metric tons. To increase the
lifting capacity of the crane to 25 metric tons, the
required area of cross section of the rope should be :
(take g  10ms 2 ) (JEE Main 2022)
4 2
(a) 6.25  10 m (b) 10  10 4 m 2
(c) 1 104 m 2 (d) 1.67  10 4 m 2
10. A steel wire of length 3.2 m  Ys  2.0 1011 Nm 2  and
15. The elongation of a wire on the surface of the earth is
a copper wire of length 4.4 m  YC  1.1  1011 Nm 2 ), 10 4 m . The same wire of same dimensions is
both of radius 1.4 mm are connected end to end. When elongated by 6  10 5 m on another planet. The
stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to be acceleration due to gravity on the planet will be
1.4 mm. The load applied, in Newton, will be: (Given ______ ms 2 . (Take acceleration due to gravity on the
22 surface of earth  10ms 2 =1) (JEE Main 2022)
 ) (JEE Main 2022)
7 16. In an experiment of determine the Young’s modulus of
(a) 360 (b) 180 wire of a length exactly 1m, the extension in the length
(c) 1080 (d) 154 of the wire is measured as 0.4mm with an uncertainty
11. The force required to stretch a wire of cross section of 0.02 mm when a load of 1kg is applied. The
1cm 2 to double its length will be : (Given Yong’s diameter of the wire is measured as 0.4mm with an
modulus of the wire  2  1011 N / m 2 ) uncertainty of 0.01mm . The error in the
(JEE Main 2022) measurement of Young’s modulus (∆Y) is found to be
(a) 1  107 N (b) 1.5  10 7 N x  1010 NM 2 . The value of x is [Take g  10m / s 2 ]
(c) 2  107 N (d) 2.5  107 N (JEE Main 2022)
12. If the length of a wire is made double and radius is 17. A uniform heavy rod of mass 20 kg. Cross sectional
halved of its respective values. Then, the Young’s area 0.4m 2 and length 20 m is hanging from a fixed
support. Neglecting the lateral contraction, the
modules of the material of the wire will:
elongation in the rod due to its own weight is
(JEE Main 2022) x  10 9 m . The value of x is _______.: (Given.
(a) Remains same Young’s modulus Y  2  1011 Nm 2 and g  10ms 2 )
(b) Become 8 times its initial value (JEE Main 2022)
1 18. In an experiment to determine the Young's modulus,
(c) Become th of its initial value
4 steel wires of five different lengths (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 m)
(d) Become 4 times its initial value but of same cross section ( 2mm 2 ) were taken and
13. The velocity of upper layer of water in a river is curves between extension and load were obtained. The
1
36 kmh . Shearing stress between horizontal layers of slope (extension/load) of the curves were plotted with
water is 10 3 Nm 2 . Depth of the river is m. (Co- the wire length and the following graph is obtained. If
the Young's modulus of given steel wires is
efficient of viscosity of water is 10 2 Pa.s )
(JEE Main 2022) x  1011 Nm 2 , then the value of x is _____.
(JEE Main 2022)
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 23. Choose the correct relationship between Poisson ratio
  . bulk modulus  K  and modulus of rigidity  
of a given solid object: (JEE Main 2023)
19. A string of area of cross-section 4mm 2 and length 0.5
is connected with a rigid body of mass 2 kg. The body 3 K  2 6 K  2
(a)   (b)  
is rotated in a vertical circular path of radius 0.5 m. 6 K  2 3 K  2
The body acquires a speed of 5 m/s at the bottom of 3K  2 6K  2
the circular path. Strain produced in the string when (c)   (d)  
6 K  2 3K  2
the body is at the bottom of the circle is .....  10 5 .
24. A force is applied to a steel wire ‘A’, rigidly clamped
(Use Young’s modulus 1011 N / m 2 and g  10m / s 2 )
at one end. As a result elongation in the wire is 0.2
(JEE Main 2022)
20. A 100 m long wire having cross-sectional area 6.25 × mm. If same force is applied to another steel wire ‘B’
10–4 m2 and Young’s modulus is 1010 Nm–2 is of double the length and a diameter 2.4 times that of
subjected to a load of 250 N, then the elongation in the the wire ‘A’, the elongation in the wire ‘B’ will be
wire will be : (JEE Main 2023) (wires having uniform circular cross sections)
(a) 6.25 × 10–3 m (b) 4 × 10–4 m (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 6.25 × 10–6 m (d) 4 × 10–3 m (a) 6.06 × 10–2 mm (b) 2.77 × 10–2 mm
21. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as
(c) 3.0 × 10–2 mm (d) 6.9 × 10–2 mm
Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R.
25. For a solid rod, the Young's modulus of elasticity is
Assertion A: Steel is used in the construction of
3.2  1011 Nm 2 and density is 8  103 kgm 3 . The
buildings and bridges.
velocity of longitudinal wave in the rod will be
Reason R: Steel is more elastic and its elastic limit is (JEE Main 2023)
high. (a) 18.96  103 ms 1 (b) 3.65  103 ms 1
In the light of above statements, choose the most
(c) 145.75  103 ms 1 (d) 6.32  103 ms 1
appropriate answer from the options given below
26. Under the same load, wire A having length 5.0 m and
(JEE Main 2023)
cross-section 2.5 × 10–5 m2 stretches uniformly by the
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct
same amount as another wire B of length 6.0 m and a
explanation of A
cross-section of 3.0 × 10–5 m2 stretches. The ratio of
(b) A is not correct but R is correct
the Young's modulus of wire A to that of wire B will
(c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct
be (JEE Main 2023)
explanation of A
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 2
(d) A is correct but R is not correct
(c) 1 : 10 (d) 1 : 1
22. The graph between two temperature scales P and Q is
27. The Young's modulus of a steel wire of length 6m and
shown in the figure. Between upper fixed point and
cross-sectional area 3mm 2 , is 2  1111 N / m 2 . The wire
lower fixed point there are 150 equal divisions of scale
P and 100 divisions on scale Q. The relationship for is suspended from its support on a given planet. A
conversion between the two scales is given by : block of mass 4kg is attached to the free end of the
(JEE Main 2023) wire. The acceleration due to gravity on the planet is
1
of its value on the earth. The elongation of wire is
4
(Take g on the earth  10 m / s 2 (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 1 cm (b) 1 mm
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.1 cm
28*. An aluminium rod with Young's modulus Y =
7.0×1010 N/m2 undergoes elastic strain of 0.04%. The
energy per unit volume stored in the rod is SI unit is:
tQ t P  180 tQ t P  30 (JEE Main 2023)
(a)  (b) 
150 100 100 150 (a) 2800 (b) 5600
tP tQ  40 tP tQ  180 (c) 11200 (d) 8400
(c)  (d) 
180 100 100 150
29. A hydraulic automobile lift is designed to lift vehicles 34. A steel rod has a radius of 20 mm and a length of 2.0
of mass 5000 kg. The area of cross section of the m. A force of 62.8 kN stretches it along its length.
cylinder carrying the load is 250 cm2. The maximum Young's modulus of steel is 2.0 × 1011N/m2. The
pressure the smaller piston would have to bear is longitudinal strain produced in the wire is _________
[Assume g = 10 m/s2]: (JEE Main 2023) × 10–5 (JEE Main 2023)
+6
(a) 2 × 10 Pa (b) 2 × 10+5 Pa 35. A metal block of mass m is suspended from a rigid
(c) 20 × 10+6 Pa (d) 200 × 10+6 Pa support through a metal wire of diameter 14 mm. The
30. Young's moduli of the material of wires A and B are in tensile stress developed in the wire under equilibrium
the ratio of 1:4, while its area of cross sections are in state is 7×105 Nm–2. The value of mass m is ________
the ratio of 1:3. If the same amount of load is applied 22
Kg. (Take, g = 9.8 ms–2 and   )
to both the wires, the amount of elongation produced 7
in the wires A and B will be in the ratio of (JEE Main 2023)
[Assume length of wires A and B are same] 36. A steel rod of length 1 m and cross sectional area 10–4
(JEE Main 2023) m2 is heated from 0°C to 200°C without being allowed
(a) 1:12 (b) 36:1 to extend or bend. The compressive tension produced
(c) 12:1 (d) 1:36 in the rod is _________ × 104 N. (Given Young's
31. A wire of length 'L' and radius 'r' is clamped rigidly at modulus of steel = 2×1011 Nm–2, coefficient of linear
one end. When the other end of the wire is pulled by a expansion = 10–5K–1) (JEE Main 2023)
force f, its length increases by 'l'. Another wire of same 37. Two wires each of radius 0.2 cm and negligible mass,
material of length '2L' and radius '2r' is pulled by a one made of steel and the other made of brass are
force '2f'. Then the increase in its length will be: loaded as shown in the figure. The elongation of the
(JEE Main 2023) steel wire is _________ × 10–6 m. [Young's modulus
(a) l / 2 (b) 2l for steel = 2×1011Nm–2 and g = 10ms–2
(c) l (d) 4l (JEE Main 2023)
32. As shown in the figure, in an experiment to determine
Young's modulus of a wire, the extension-load curve is
plotted. The curve is a straight line passing through the
origin and makes an angle of 45 with the load axis.
The length of wire is 62.8 cm and its diameter is 4
mm. The Young's modulus is found to be x  104 Nm 2
The value of x is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
38. The length of a wire becomes l1 and l2 when 100 N and

120 N tensions are applied respectively. If 10l2  11l1 ,
1
the natural length of wire will be l1 . Here the value
x
33. A certain ‘P’ is applied to 1 litre of water and 2 litre of
of x is _____ (JEE Main 2023)
a liquid separately. Water gets compressed to 0.01%
39. The elastic potential energy stored in a steel wire of
whereas the liquid gets compressed to 0.03%. The
length 20m stretched through 2 cm is 80 J. The cross
ration of Bulk modulus of water to that of the liquid is
sectional area of the wire is ___________ mm2.
3 (Given, y = 2.0 × 1011 Nm–2) (JEE Main 2023)
. The value of x is _____. (JEE Main 2023)
x
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 6. A bar of cross section A is subjected to two equal and
1. The length of an elastic string is a meter when the opposite tensile forces as shown. Consider a cross section
longitudinal tension is 4 N and b metre when the tension is BB as shown in figure. The shearing stress at this point is
5 N. The length of the string (in metre) when the
longitudinal tension is 9 N is
(a) a – b (b) 5b – 4a
(c) 2b – a/2 (d) 4a – 3b
5
2. A substance breaks down under a stress of 10 Pa. If the
3 3
density of the wire is 2 × 10 kg/m , find the minimum
length of the wire which will break under its own weight
(g = 10 m/s ).
2
Fcos 2  F
(a) (b) A
A
(a) 10 m (b) 2.5 m
Fsin 2
(c) 4 m (d) 5 m (c) (d) zero
2A
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1 and r2
is stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel to length in 7. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length  and
opposite directions and normal to end faces. If Y denotes area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is  due
the Young’s modulus, then extension produced is to its own weight if it is suspended from the ceiling of a
room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is
FL FL
(a) r 2Y (b) rY 2gL2 gL2
(a) (b)
1 1
A 2A
FL FLY 2gL g 2
(c) r r Y (d) r r (c) (d)
1 2 1 2 A AL
4. One end of uniform wire of length L and of weight W is 8. A small but heavy block of mass 10 kg is attached to a
7 2
attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1 is wire 0.3m long. Its breaking stress is 4.8 × 10 N/m . The
–6 2
suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross area of cross section of the wire is 10 m . The maximum
section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height (3L/4) angular velocity with which the block can be rotated in
from its lower end is the horizontal circle is
(a) 4 rad/s (b) 8 rad/s
W1  W
(a) s
(b)  W1  4  s (c) 10 rad/s (d) 32 rad/s
9. A 5 kg rod of square cross section 5 cm on a side and 1 m
 3W  long is pulled along a smooth horizontal surface by a force
 W1  4  W1  W applied at one end. The rod has a constant acceleration of
(c) (d) s
s 2
2 m/s . Determine the elongation in the rod. (Young’s
9 2
5. Two bars A and B of circular cross section and same modulus of the material of the rod is 5 × 10 N/m )
volume and made of the same material are subjected to (a) Zero, as for elongation to be there, equal and opposite
tension. If the diameter of A is half that of B and if the force must act on the rod
force applied to both the rod is the same and it is in the (b) Non-zero but can’t be determine from the given
elastic limit, the ratio of extension of A to that of B will be situation
(a) 16 (b) 8 (c) 0.4 m
(d) 16 m
(c) 4 (d) 2
10. A solid sphere of radius R, made up of a material of bulk 14. Choose the correct statements from the following :
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical (a) Steel is more elastic than rubber.
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the surface
of the liquid. When a mass M is placed on the piston to (b) The stretching of a coil spring is determined by the
compress the liquid, the fractional change in the radius of Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring.
the sphere is (c) The frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork.
Mg Mg
(a) (b) 3AK
AK (d) When a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching)
stress the restoring forces are caused by interatomic
3Mg Mg attraction.
(c) (d)
AK 2AK
15. A heavy block of mass 150 kg hangs with the help of three
11. A uniform rod of mass m, length L, area of cross-section A vertical wires of equal length and equal cross sectional
is rotated about an axis passing through one of its ends area as shown in the figure.
and perpendicular to its length with constant angular
velocity  in a horizontal plane. If Y is the Young’s modulus
of the material of rod, the increase in its length due to
rotation of rod is
m2 L2 m2 L2
(a) (b)
AY 2AY
m2 L2 2m2 L2
(c) (d)
3AY AY
12. Figure shows the stress-strain graphs for materials A Wire is attached to the mid-point (centre of mass) of block.
and B. Take Y2 = 2Y1. For this arrangement mark out the correct
statment(s).
(a) The wire I and III should have same Young’s modulus.
(b) Tension in I and III would be always equal.
(c) Tension in I and III would be different.
(d) Tension in II is 75 g.
16. A composite rod consists of a steel rod of length 25 cm
and area 2A and a copper rod of length 50 cm and area A.
The composite rod is subjected to an axial load F. If the
Young’s mouduli of steel and copper are in the ratio 2 : 1,
From the graph it follows that
then
(a) material A has a higher Young’s modulus
(a) the extension produced in copper rod will be more
(b) material B is more ductile
(c) material A is more brittle (b) the extension in copper and steel parts will be in the
ratio 1 : 8
(d) material A can withstand a greater stress
13. Two wires A and B have the same cross-section and are (c) the stress applied to copper rod will be more
made of the same material, but the length of wire A is twice (d) no extension will be produced in the steel rod
that of B. Then, for a given load
(a) the extension of A will be twice that of B
(b) the extensions of A and B will be equal
(c) the strain in A will be half that in B
(d) the strains in A and B will be equal
Multiple Choice Questions 21. Assertion : The stress–strain graphs are shown in the figure
17. A metal wire length L, cross section area A, and Young’s for two materials A and B are shown in figure. Young’s
modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F. F is varying modulus of A is greater than that of B.
in such a way that F is always slightly greater than the
elastic forces of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
in the wire is l, up to this instant
YA 2
(a) the work done by F is
2L
YA 2
(b) the work done by F is
L
Reason : The Young’s modulus for small strain is,

YA 2
(c) the elasitc potential energy stored in wire is
2L stress
Y  slope of linear portion, of graph; and slope
(d) no energy is lost during elongation strain
of A is more than that of B.
(a) A (b) B
Numeric Value Type Questions
(c) C (d) D
18. A block of mass m produces an extension of 9 cm in an
elastic spring of length 60 cm when it is hung by it, and
the system is in equilibrium. The spring is cut in two parts Match the Column
of 40 cm and 20 cm lengths. The same block hangs in
22. In the Column I type of stresses or strains are mentioned
equilibrium with the help of these two parts. Find the
and some effect of these stresses within the body are
extension (in cm) in this case.
mentioned in Column II. Match the entries of Column-I
19. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2 mm and 4 with the entries of Column-II.
mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of 2
Column-I Column-II
N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same mate-
rial and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of (A) Compressive stress (P) Intermolecular
wire A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of separation in
a 1 stresssed state is greater
a : b. Then can be expressed as where x is .......
b x than equilibrium
Assertion & Reason separation.
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and (B) Tensile stress (Q) Intermolecular
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. separation in
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason stressed state is less
is not the correct explanation of the assertion. than equilibrium
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false. separation.
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false. (C) Longitudinal stress (R) Internal developed
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true. forces are
20. Assertion : Young’s modulus for a perfectly plastic body attractive in nature.
is zero. (D) Lateral strain (S) Internal developed
Reason : For a perfectly plastic body, restoring force is forces are repulsive
zero. in nature
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Passage 24. Just on crossing the yield region, the material will have
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 23 to 25 (a) reduced stress
According to Hooke’s law, within the elastic limit stress/ (b) increased stress
strain = constant. This constant depends on the type of (c) breaking stress
strain or the type of force acting. Tensile stress might result
(d) constant stress
in compressional or elongative strain; however, a tangential
stess can only cause a shearing strain. After crossing the stress
elastic limit, the material undergoes elongation and beyond 25. If be x in elastic region and y in the region of yield,
strain
a stage beaks. All modulus of elastically are basically
then
constants for the materials under stress.
(a) x = y (b) x > y
23. Two wires of same material have length and radius (  , r)
(c) x < y (d) x = 2y
 r
and  2,  . The ratio of their Young’s modulus is
 2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

(a) P has more tensile strength than Q
 4MLg 
1. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  (b) P is more ductile than Q
by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and (c) P is more brittle than Q
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an (d) The Young’s modulus of P is more than that of Q.
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a 4. A block of weight 100 N is suspended by copper and steel
micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 wires of same cross sectional area 0.5 cm2 and, length3
mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100. m and 1 m, respectively. Their other ends are fixed on a
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y ceiling as shown in figure. The angles subtended by
measurement is (2012) copper and steel wires with ceiling are 30° and 60°,
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are respectively. If elongation in copper wire is (  c ) and
the same
 c
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that elongation in steel wire is (s) , then the ratio  is
due to the error in the measurement of l. s
___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011

(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
N/m2 and 2 × 1011 N/m2, respectively)
due to the error in the measurement of d.
(2019)
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
that due to the error in the measurement of l.
2. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the arrangement
is stretched by applying forces at two ends, the ratio of the
elongation in the thin wire to that in the thick wire is
(2013)
dP
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 5. A cubical solid aluminium (bulk modulus =  V = 70
dV
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00
GPa) block has an edge length of 1 m on the surface of the
3. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two materials P earth. It is kept on the floor of a 5 km deep ocean. Taking
and Q, a student by mistake puts strain on the y-axis and the average density of water and the acceleration due to
stress on the x-axis as shown in the figure. Then the
gravity to be 103 kg m 3 and 10 ms 2 , respectively, the
correct statement(s) is (are). (2015)
change in the edge length of the block in mm is _____.
(2020)
Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
FLUID MECHANICS 31
11
FLUID MECHANICS
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID Chapter 11
MECHANICS 32
FLUID MECHANICS
1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUIDS
1.1 Introduction to Fluids and Fluid Pressure
 Pressure P at any point is defined as the normal force
per unit area.
dF
P
dA Fig. 11.2
 Pressure at two points which are at a depth separation
of h when fluid is at rest or moving with constant velocity
Fig. 11.1 is related by the expression
 The SI unit of pressure is the Pascal and
2
1 Pascal = 1 N/m
NOTE:
Fluid force acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid,
no matter how that surface is oriented. Hence pressure,
has no intrinsic direction of its own, it is a scalar.
1.2 Relative Density or Specific Gravity

Fig. 11.3
 Relative density, or specific gravity, is the ratio of the
P2 – P1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.
density (mass of a unit volume) of a substance to the
density of a given reference material. 2.2 Types of Pressure
 lf the relative density is exactly 1 then the densities are Atmospheric Pressure
equal: that is, equal volumes of the two substances
 It is the pressure exerted by the before earth earth’s
have the same mass. atmosphere. Normal atmospheric pressure at sea level is
5
1 atmosphere (atm) that is equal to 1.013 × 10 Pa.
substance
RD 
reference Gauge Pressure
 Gauge pressure is the difference between absolute
RD = relative density
pressure and atmospheric pressure.
substance = density of substance being measured
 If the gauge pressure is above the atmospheric pressure,
reference = density of the reference it’s positive.
 If the gauge pressure is below the atmospheric pressure,

it’s negative. Since gauge pressure readings include
2. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure can differ
2.1 Variation of Pressure
depending on weather and sea level.
 Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane or at same
level when the fluid is at rest or moving with constant  If you’re measuring pressure in an environment that
velocity is same. won’t be heavily affected by the atmosphere, you can
measure in pounds per square inch gauge .
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 33
Absolute Pressure 2.4 Hydrostatic paradox

Absolute pressure is gauge pressure plus atmospheric  Hydrostatic Paradox
pressure. An absolute pressure reading of zero can only be “Hydrostatic Paradox states that, the pressure at a
achieved in a perfect vacuum and only naturally occurs in certain horizontal level in the fluid is proportional to the
outer space. vertical distance to the surface of the fluid.”
 Hydrostatic Paradox is mathematically expressed as:
Ph
 Example
Three-vessel X, ‘Y, Z of different shape, containing a
different volume of liquid, but all exert the same
pressure(P) at all points at the same horizontal level.
3. FORCE EXERTED BY FLUIDS ON

THE WALLS OF THE CONTAINER
Fig. 11.4 3.1 Horizontal Force Exerted on the Walls of the Container
Force on Side Wall of a Vesssel
2.3 Manometer
A Manometer is a device to measure pressures. A common Consider a strip of width dx at a depth x from the surface of
simple manometer consists of a U shaped tube of glass the liquid as shown in figure, and on this strip the force due
filled with some liquid. Typically the liquid is mercury to the liquid:
because of its high density.
dF  xg  bdx (perpendicular to the wall) ....(i)
Fig. 11.6
Net force on the wall from eq (i).
h
F   dF   xg bdx
0
gbh 2
F
2
Fig. 11.5
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 34
Average Pressure on Side Wall According to principle of hydraulics,

The average pressure on the wall can be given as : F1 F2 A
P1  P2    F2  2 F1
A1 A2 A1
F
Paverage 
bh
5. BUOYANCY
 Buoyancy is the tendency of an object to float in a
1 gbh 2 1 fluid.
   gh
2 bh 2
 All liquids and gases in the presence of gravity exert an
Above equation shows that the average pressure on side upward force known as the buoyant force on any object
vertical wall is half of the net pressure at the bottom of the immersed in them.
vessel.  Buoyant Force
Torque on the Side Wall due to Fluid Pressure  The buoyant force is the upward force exerted on an
As shown in figure, due to the force dF, the side wall object wholly or partly immersed in a fluid.
experiences a torque about the bottom edge of the side  This upward force is also called Upthrust.
which is given as :  Due to the buoyant force, a body submerged partially
d  dF   h  x  or fully in a fluid appears to lose its weight, ie. appears
to be lighter.
 xgb dx  h  x  Following factors affect buoyant force:
 Density of the fluid
h
Thus net torque is    d   gb  hx  x dx

2
 Volume of the fluid displaced
0
 Local acceleration due to gravity

 h3 h3  5.2 Archimedes Principle
 gb   
2 3 Archimedes’ principle states that:
“The upward buoyant force that is exerted on a body
1 immersed in a fluid, whether partially or fully submerged,
 gbh 3
6 is equal to the weight of the fluid that the body displaces
and acts in the upward direction at the center of mass of
4. PASCAL’S LAW the displaced fluid”.
 A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is  Archimedes Principle Explanation
transmitted equally to every portion of the fluid in all
direction of to the walls of the containing vessel.
 There are a lot of practical applications of Pascal’s law
e.g Hydraulic lift
Fig. 11.8
If you look at the figure, the weight due to gravity is opposed
by the thrust provided by the fluid. The object inside the
Fig. 11.7 liquid only feels the total force acting on it as the weight.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 35
Because the actual gravitational force is decreased by the From Newton’s second law
liquid’s upthrust, the object feels as though its weight is FB – mg = ma0 …(1)
reduced. The apparent weight is thus given by: or B = m (g + a0) …(2)
Equation (1) and (2) are similar to the corresponding
Apparent weight = Weight of object (in the air)
equations for unaccelerated liquid with the only differ-
- Thrust force (buoyancy) ence that g + a takes the role of g.
Archimedes’s principle tells us that the weight loss is equal
to the weight of liquid the object displaces.
6. ACCELERATED FLUIDS
 Archimedes Principle Formula
 Pressure Distribution in an Accelerated Frame
Archimedes law states that the buoyant force on an object
 We’ve seen that when a liquid is filled in a container,
is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the object.
generally its free surface remains horizontal as shown
Mathematically written as:
in figure 10.9 as for its equilibrium its free surface must
Fb   g  V be perpendicualr to gravity i.e. horizontal.
Where Fb is the buoyant force,  is the density of the fluid,  Due to same reason we said that pressure at every point
of a liquid layer parallel to its free surface remains
V is the submerged volume, and g is the acceleration due to
constant, Similar situation exist when liquid is in an
gravity.
accelerated frame as shown in figure.
Floatation  Due to acceleration of container, liquid filled in it
When a solid body is dipped into a fluid, the fluid exerts experiences a pseudo force relative to container and
and upward force of buoyancy on the solid. If the force of due to this the free surface of liquid which remains
buoyancy equals the weight of the solid, the solid will remain normal to the gravity now is filled as shown in figure 10.10
in equilibrium. This is called floatation. When the overall and normal to the direction of effective gravity.
density of the solid is smaller than the density of the fluid,
 Thus we can get the inclination angle of free surface of
the solid floats with a part of it in the fluid. The fraction
liquid from horizontal as
dipped is such that the weight of the displaced fluid equals
the weight of the solid. a
  tan 1   ....(i)
Center of Buoyancy g
The center of buoyancy is the point where if you were to
take all of the displaced fluid and hold it by that point it
would remain perfectly balanced, assuming you could hold
a fluid in a fixed shape. This point is also called the center
of mass. The center of buoyancy for an object is the center
of mass for the fluid it displaces.
Buoyant Force in an accelerated Fluid
Fig. 11.9 Fig. 11.10
Suppose a body is dipped inside a liquid of density 
 Now from equilibrium of liquid we can state that
placed in an elevator going up with an acceleration a 0 . Let pressure at every point in a liquid layer parallel to the
us calculate the force of buoyancy FB on this body. As was free Surface
done earlier, let us suppose that we substitute the body  Remains same for example if we find pressure at a point
into the liquid by the same liquid of equal volume. The A in the accelerated containers shown in figure 10.11 is
entire liquid becomes a homogenous mass and hence he given as
substituted liquid is at rest with respect to the rest of the
liquid. Thus, the substituted liquid is also going up with an PA  P0  h a 2  g 2 ...(ii)
acceleration a 0 together with the rest of the liquid.
Where h is the depth of the point A below the free surface
The forces acting on the substituted liquid are of liquid along effective gravity and P0 is the atmospheric
(a) The buoyant force FB and pressure acting on free surface of the liquid.
(b) The weight mg of the substituted liquid.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 36
h g 2  a2
l2  h cos ec 
a
From eq. (iii) we have
PA  P0  h g 2  a 2
Here we can see that while evaluating pressure at point A

Fig. 11.11
from vertical direction we haven’t mentioned any thing
about pseudo acceleration as along vertical length l1 due
to pseudo acceleration at every point pressure must be
constant similarly in horizontal direction at every point due
to gravity pressure remains constant.
Using the above concept we can write pressure equations
for a static fluid. These pressure equations are very helpful
in solving numerical examples.
Fig. 11.12
6.2 Fluid in a Rotating Container
 The pressure at point A can also be obtained in an
 When tube is rotated, liquid starts to flow radially
another way as shown in figure 10.12.
outward. Let the shift of liquid mal as shown in
 If l1 and l2 are the vertical and horizontal distances of figure 10.14. Let the cross sectional area of tube be S.
point. Then pressure at point A will be
 Here the pressure difference between point A and B can
PA  P0  l1g  P0  l2 a ....(iii) be given by integrating the pressure difference across
an element of width dx, which is given as
Here l1g is the pressure at A due to the vertical height of
dP  dx  2 x
liquid above A and according to Pascal’s Law pressure at
A is given as Now integrating from A to B, we get
L
PA  P0  l1g ....(iv) PB  PA   H 2 xdx 2 2
y

2
 L  y2 
here we can write l1 as
h a 2  g2
l1  h s ec  
g
or from equation (iv)
PA  P0  h a 2  g 2
Similarly if we consider the horizontal distance of point A

from free surface of liquid, which is l2 then du e to pseudo
acceleration of container the pressure at point A is given
as
PA  P0  l2 a ....(v)
Here l2 is given as
Fig. 11.13
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 37
If 2  1 then P2  P1 and the junction of the liquid can

not remain in equilibrium, it will be displaced to the left as-
shown in figure 10.16. The displacement of the junction is
such that the pressure on the two sides at every point must
be same, then only the liquid remains in equilibrium.
In figure 10.16, if x be the displacement of the junction, the

pressure at the bottom from the two sides must be same.
Thus now P1  P2 , here P1 and P2 are given as
P1  P0  l1 g  x2 g
P2  P0   l  x  2 g
Fig. 11.14 On equation P1 and P2 we get the value of x.

Thus pressure at point C can be given as
PC  PB  yg
8. TYPES OF FLUID FLOWS
and at point A, pressure is atmospheric, thus we have
 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)
The flow in which the velocity of fluid particles crossing

2 2
PC 
2
 L  y 2   0  yg a particular point is the same at all the times. Thus, each
particle takes the same path as taken by a previous
particle through that point.
7. MISCELLANEOUS CASES IN FLUID STATICS
7.1 U-tube problems
Consider the situation shown in figure 10.15, a U tube,
filled with equal volumes of two different liquids 1 and 2.
In case-1, the pressure at the left of the bottom is
P  P0  l1 g
At the right pressure is
Fig. 11.17
P2  P0  l2 g
 Line of flow
It is the path taken by a particle in flowing liquid. In case of a
steady flow, it is called streamline. Two streamlines can
never intersect. Streamlines do not intersect each other
 Turbulent flow
It is type of fluid flow in which the fluid undergoes
irregular fluctuations, or mixing, in contrast to laminar
flow, in which the fluid moves in smooth paths or layers.
In turbulent flow the speed of the fluid at a point is
continuously undergoing changes in both magnitude
and direction. The flow of wind and rivers is generally
turbulent in this sense, even if the currents are gentle.
The air or water swirls and eddies while its overall bulk
Fig. 11.15 Fig. 11.16 moves along a specific direction.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 38
 A1 V1 = A2 V2
 mass flows rate = AV
(where  is the density of the liquid.)
Fig. 11.18  Thus AV = constant, velocity of liquid is smaller in codes

parts and velocity is smaller in larger part of the body.
Reynold’s number
Thrust Force
 The stability of laminar flow is maintained by viscous
forces. It is observed, however that laminar or steady The total normal force exerted by a liquid at rest on a surface
flow is disrupted when the rate of flow is large. Irregular, in contact with it is called fluid thrust. SI unit fluid thrust is
unsteady motion, turbulence, sets in at high flow rates. newton (N) and is a vector quantity.
 Reynolds numbers defined as a dimensionless number
Force by fluid on bent pipe corners
whose value gives one an approximate idea, whether
the flow rate would be turbulent or laminar. Forces on pipe bend due to slug flow
When fluid flows through a pipe bend or elbow, the fluid changes
vD
Re  direction and hence there is a change in momentum. As per
 Newton’s Second Law: ‘’The rate of change of momentum of a
body is equal to the net force acting on the body’’. Slug forces are
where,  = the density of the fluid flowing with a
generated when there is ‘two-phase’ (gaseous and liquid phase)
speed v. fluid flowing through pipes and slugs of liquid that are formed
D = the diameter of the tube. intermittently travel at relatively high velocity.
 = the coefficient of viscosity of the fluid. The liquid slug can cause large reaction forces at changes in
direction such as elbows or tee connections. High slug forces
 It is found that flow is streamline or laminar for Re less
have the potential to cause large pipe deflection or damage to the
than 1000. The flow is turbulent for Re > 2000. The flow supports if they are not designed to withstand them. The slug
becomes unsteady for Re between 1000 and 2000. load lasts until the slug has traversed the elbow and then drops to
near zero. The time duration of the load is calculated as slug
Note:- length divided by the fluid velocity.
For lower density and higher viscosity fluids laminar flow
is more probable.
9. EQUATION OF CONTINUITY
In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow in
a steady flow is A1 V1 t. The same volume must flow out as Fig. 11.20
the liquid is incompressible. The volume flowing out in t is Let us assume a horizontal pipe bend turning through and
A2 V2 t. It is a consequence of conservation of mass. angle  as shown in figure below..
The following details apply:
V = Velocity of flow
Q = Flow Rate
 = Fluid Density
A = Cross-section area of pipe ID
 = Change in direction at Bend
Fig. 11.19
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 39
The forces exerted on the bend by the flowing fluid are Fx  It is a mathematical consequences of low of conservation
and Fy respectively. of energy an fluid dynamics.
Force in X-direction
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fx) = Rate of
change of momentum in x-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in x-direction – Initial velocity
in x-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow Rate (Q) × (Vcos  – V) = (  ) × (Q)
(Vcos  – V)
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction
(Fx) =  QV(cos  – 1) ….(1) Fig. 11.21
Force in Y-direction  Bernoulli’s equation is valid only for incompressible
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fy) = Rate of steady flow of a fluid with no viscosity.
change on momentum in y-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in y-direction – Initial 11. APPLICATION OF FLUID DYNAMICS
velocity in y-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow rate (Q) × (Vsin  – 0) = (  ) × (Q) 11.1 Velocity of Efflux
× (Vsin  )
Net force acting on the bend in y-direction
(Fy) =  Q(Vsin  ) …..(2)
Resultant Force acting on the Bend
The resultant force acting on the bend
2 2
 FR    Fx    Fy  …(3)
Solving equation (3) gives

The resultant force actin on the bend
 FR   QV 2 1 – cos   …(4)
Substituting Q = A × V
 FR   AV2 2 1 – cos   …(5) Fig. 11.22
For 90° elbow or bend, cos   0 hence Let us find the velocity with which liquid comes out of a
hole at a depth h below the liquid surface.
Using Bernoulli’s theorem,
 FR   AV 2 2 …(6)
1 2 1 2
PA  vA  gh A  PB  v B  gh B
10. BERNOULLI’S EQUATION 2 2
In a stream line flow of an ideal fluid, the sum of pressure 1 2 1 2

 Patm  v  gh  Patm  v  0
energy per unit volume, potential energy per unit volume 2 A 2
and kinetic energy per unit volume is always constant at all Note:
cross section of the liquid.
PB = Patm, because we have opened the liquid to atmosphere)
ρV 2
P+ρgh+ =Constant 2 2
2  v = vA + 2gh
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 40
Using equation of continuity 2 2

Q Q
   2 hg (Q = av)
AvA = av 2
a2
2
a1
A: area of cross-section of vessel
a: area of hole 2hg

 Q  a 1a 2 2 2
a  a2
1
2 a2 2
 v  v  2gh Here Q is the rate of fluid flow
A2
11.3 Magnus Effect
2gh  Magnus effect is described as a phenomenon that is
 v 2 2
 2gh (if the hole is very small) mainly characterized by a spinning object that is moving
1 a / A
through fluid wherein there is relative motion between
the spinning body and the fluid.
11.2 Venturi Meter
 When the Magnus effect takes place, the path of the
This is an instrument for measuring the rate of flow of fluids.
spinning object is usually deflected in a way that is
completely different from when the object is not
spinning. The deflection that occurs can be described
by the difference in pressure of the fluid that is present
on the opposite sides of the spinning object.
 In simple terms, there is a generation of a sidewise force

on a spinning object. Magnus effect is greatly affected
by the speed of rotation or we can say that it is
dependent on it.
 The Magnus effect is why a football player is able to

bend a football into the goal around a 5-person wall
and the movement of the cricket ball as seen in
conventional swing bowling.
Fig. 11.23
If PA is pressure at A and PB is pressure at B,
PA – PB = hg
[h : difference of heights of liquids of density  in vertical

tubes]
If v1 is velocity at a and v2 is velocity at B
Q = a1v1 = a2v2 [equation of continuity]
2 2
v1 v
Pa    Pa   2 [Bernoulli’s Theorem]
2 2
2 2 2 2
 v 2  v1   Pa  PB   hg
 
Fig. 11.24
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 41
11.4 Aerodynamic lift 12.2 Stoke’s Law

 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its
Dynamic lift is the force that acts on a body by virtue of its
motion is opposed by a viscous force depending on the
motion through a fluid. It can be defined as:
velocity and shape and size of the body.
Dynamic lift is the force which acts on a body such as an  The viscous drag on a spherical body of radius r, moving
airplane wing hydro fall or spinning Ball by virtue of its with velocity v, in a viscous medium of viscosity  is given
motion through a fluid. by
Fviscous = 6rv
This relation is called Stoke’s law.
12. VISCOSITY
12.3 Terminal Velocity
The property of a fluid by virtue of which it opposes It is maximum constant velocity acquired by the body while
the relative motion between its different layers is known falling freely in a viscous medium.
as viscosity and the force that is into play is called the viscous 2
2r    s  g
force. vr 
9
12.1 Newton’a Law of Viscocity Where r is raduis of body  is density of body,  is density
of liquid and  is coefficient of viscosity.
It defines relationship between the shear strers and rate of
fluid subjected to an externals strers.
where  is a constant depending upon the nature of the
liquid and is called the coefficient of viscosity and velocity
dv
gradient =  dy
–2
S.I. unit of coefficient of viscosity is Pa.s or Nsm .
CGS unit of viscocity is poise. (1 Pa.s = 10 Poise)
 Viscous force is given by :
dv
F  A
dy
Fig. 11.26
12.4 Poiseuille’s Formula
This law states that the flow of liquid depend on variables
such as length of tube (L) radius(r), pressure difference (P)
and coefficient of visocity 
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in capillary
tubes.
Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by
4
 Pr
V
8
Fig. 11.25
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 42
13. SURFACE TESNSION  The adhesion and cohesion forces, both vary in their
strengths. For example, if cohesion forces between the
13.1 Cohesion and Adhesion water molecules are stronger than that of the adhesion
 As for the definitions, the tendency of two or more forces between them, then the individual molecules will
different molecules to bond with each other is known atiract towards each other thus resulting in settling. In
as Adhesion, whereas the force of attraction between case, the adhesion forces of the water surfaces are
the same molecules is known as Cohesion. stronger than that of the cohesion forces of the water
molecules. then the water tends to disperse.
 The adhesion forces can be one of the results of
electrostatic forces which are exerted on different
substances.
 The cohesive forces are associated with Van der Waals

forces and hydrogen bonding that cause liquids such
as water to withstand the separation.
 When a glass surface is poured with water, both

adhesive and the cohesive forces act on the surface of
the water. A strong adhesive force tends the liquid to
spread over the surface whereas a strong cohesive force
is responsible for the formation of water droplets on
the water surface. Fig. 11.27 Fig. 11.28 Fig. 11.29
DIFFERENCE BETWEENADHESIONAND COHESION
Sr. no. Adhesion Cohesion

1. Adhesion happens between two dissimilar When two similar substances or molecules face the force of
molecules or substances attraction this force is known as cohesion force.
2. Adhesion is generally the force of attraction Cohesion force is rampant among water molecules
present between the water molecules and the
walls of xylem vessels.
3. Capillary action and meniscus (the curved Surface tension meniscus and capilary action are the effects
surface which is formed by any liquid in a of cohesion.
4. Adhesion is caused by electrostatic or Cohesion is caused by hydrogen bonding and Van der Walls forces
mechanical forces that exist among two kinds
of different substances.
5. A strong adhesion force causes the liquid to A strong force of cohesion forms water droplets on any surface
spread all over the surface
13.2 Introduction to surface tension Surface tension is a property of liquid where liquid surface
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force per behaves like a stretched membrane which have the tendency
unit length in the plane of the liquid surface at right angles to contract tending to have minimum possible area at the
to either side of an imaginary line drawn on that surface. surface. The property is called surface tension.
2
F Unit of surface tension in MKS system : N/m, J/m
So, S  where S = surface tension of liquid. 2
 CGS system  Dyne/cm, erg/cm
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 43
13.3 Surface Energy 16. CAPILLARITY

In order to increase the surface area, the work has to be
 A very narrow glass tube with fine bore and open at
done over the surface of the liquid. This work done is stored
both ends is known as capillary tube. When a capillary
in the liquid surface as its potential energy. Hence the surface
tube in dipped in a liquid, then liquid will rise or fall in
energy of a liquid can be defined as the excess potential
the tube, this action is termed as capillarity.
energy per unit area of the liquid surface.
Fig. 11.30
W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

Note:
(1) Work done in formation of drop of radius
2
r = surface tension × A = 4r S
(2) Work done in formation of soap bubble Fig. 11.31
2
= 2 × surafce tension × A = 8r S
2Scos  2S
h 
rg Rg
14. EXCESS PRESSURE where, S = surface tension,
 Excess pressure in a liquid drop or bubble in a liquid is  = angle of contact,
2S r = radius of capillary tube,
P , S is surface tension
R R = radius of meniscus, and
4S
 Excess pressure in a soap bubble is P =  = density of liquid.
R
(because it has two free surfaces)  Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length :
If the actual height to which a liquid will rise in a capillary

15. ANGLE OF CONTACT tube is ‘h’ then a capillary tube of length less than ‘h’
can be called a tube of “insufficient length”.
 The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface at
the point of contact and the solid surface inside the In such a case, liquid rises to the top of the capillary
liquid is called the angle of contact. It depends upon tube of length l (l < h) and adjusts the radius of curvature
nature of liqiud and solid in contact. of its meniscus until the excess pressure is equalised by
the pressure of liquid column of length l. (Note liquid
 If the glass plate is immersed in mercury, the surface is does not overflow).
curved and the mercury is depressed below. Angle of
contact is obtuse for mercury. 2
  g ... (i)
 If the plate is dipped in water with its side vertical, the r
water is drawn-up along the plane and assumes the If r were the actual radius of curvature,
curved shape as shown. Angle of contact is acute for 2
water.   h g ...(ii)
r
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 44
Comparing (i) and (ii)
Fig. 10.32
2
 r   hr
g
hr
 r  i.e. radius of curvature r’ can be calculated.

Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion
1. Liquid will wet the solid. 1. Critical. 1. Liquid will not wet the solid.
2. Meniscus is concave. 2. Meniscus is plane. 2. Meniscus is convex.
3. Angle of contact is acute  < 90°). 3. Angle of contact is 90°. 3. Angle of contact is obtuse  > 90°).
4. Pressure below the meniscus is 4. Pressure below the 4. Pressure below the meniscus
lesser than above it by (2T/r), meniscus is same as more then above it by (2T/r),
i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

r r
5. In capillary there will be rise. 5. No capillarity. 5. In capillary there will be fall
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 45
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

2
Introduction to Fluids & Hydrostatic Pressure 6. A tube 1 cm in cross section is attached to the top of a
2
1. Pressure at a point inside a liquid does not depend on: vessel 1 cm high and of cross section 100 cm . Water is
(a) the depth of the point below the surface of the liquid poured into the system filling it to a depth of 100 cm above
(b) the nature of the liquid the bottom of the vessel as shown in the figure. Take g
(c) the acceleration due to gravity at that point –2
= 10 ms . Find the correct statement.
(d) the shape of the containing vessel
2. Two stretched membranes of area 2 cm2 and 3 cm2 are placed
in a liquid at the same depth. The ratio of the pressure on
them is:
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 22 : 32
3. A dam for water reservoir is built thicker at the bottom than
at the top because:
(a) pressure of water is very large at the bottom due to its
large depth
(b) water is likely to have more density at the bottom due to
its large depth (a) The force exerted by the water against the bottom of
(c) quantity of water at the bottom is large the vessel is 100 N.
(d) none of the above (b) The weigth of water in the system is 1.99 N.
4. In the given figure shown.
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(d) Neither (a) nor (b) is correct.
7. A tube of uniform cross-section has two vertical portions
connected with a horizontal thin tube 8 cm long at their
lower ends. Enough water to occupy 22 cm of the tube is
poured into one branch and enough oil of specific gravity
0.8 to occupy 22 cm is poured into the other. Assuming
that interface remains stable find the distance ( in cm) of
(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0 the common surface E of the two liquids from point B.
(c) p1 > p2 (d) p = 0
5. A U-tube contains water and oil separated by mercury.
The mercury columns in the two arms are at the same level
with 10 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of oil in the
other, as shown in figure. What is the relative density
of oil ?
Force Exerted by Fluids on the Walls of the Container &

Pascal's Law
8. The height to which a cylindrical vessel be filled with a
homogeneous liquid, to make the average force with which
the liquid presses the side of the vessel equal to the force
exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the vessel, is equal to:
(a) half of the radius of the vessel
(b) radius of the vessel
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.0 (c) one-fourth of the radius of the vessel
(c) 1.25 (d) none of these (d) three-fourths of the radius of the vessel
FLUID MECHANICS 46
9. A uniformly tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density

F 2F
900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel (a) (b)
A A
due to the liquid is: (g = 10 m/s2)
4F
(c) (d) 0
A
13. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then is filled to
the top with oil of denisty 0.85 g/cm3. The pressure at the
bottom of the tank, due to these liquids, is:
(a) 1.85 gf/cm2 (b) 89.25 gf/cm2
(c) 462.5 gf/cm2 (d) 500 gf/cm2
(a) 3.6 N (b) 7.2 N 14. A piston of cross-sectional area 100 cm2 is used in a
(c) 9.0 N (d) 14.4 N hydraulic press to exert a force of 107 dyne on the water.
10. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same base The cross-sectional area of the other piston which supports
area and are filled with water upto the same height h (see an object having a mass 2000 kg is:
figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for (a) 100 cm2 (b) 109 cm2
vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the
(c) 2 × 104 cm2 (d) 2 × 1010 cm2
vessels are WA and WB. Then 2
15. A cylindrical jar of cross-sectional area 0.01 m is filled
with water to a height of 50 cm. It carries a tight-fitting
piston of negligible mass. What is the pressure at the bottom
of the jar when a mass of 1 kg is placed on the piston?
–2
Take g = 10 ms .
5
(a) 10 Pa (b) 6000 Pa
(c) 5000 Pa (d) 1000 Pa
(a) FA > FB ; WA > WB (b) FA = FB ; WA > WB
16. A given shaped glass tube having uniform cross-section is
(c) FA = FB ; WA < WB (d) FA > FB ; WA = WB filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as
11. A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The shown in fig. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular
cross-sectional area of the lift on which the car is supported velocity  then:
–2 2
is 5 × 10 m . What is the pressure on the smaller piston,
if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ? Take g
–2
= 10 ms .
5 5
(a) 6 × 10 Pa (b) 5 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 4 × 10 Pa (d) 3 × 10 Pa
12. Figure shown water filled in a symmetrical container. Four
pistons of equal area A are used at the four openings to
keep the water in equilibrium. Now an additional force F
is applied at each piston. The increase in the pressure at
the centre of the container due to this addition is
(a) water levels in both A and B go up

(b) water level in section A goes up and that in B comes
down
(c) water level in section A comes down and that in B it
goes up
(d) water level remain same in both sections.
FLUID MECHANICS 47
Buoyancy 24. A block of wood is floating in a lake. The apparent weight

of the floating block is
17. When a body is wholly or partially immersed in a liquid it
appears to lose weight. This loss of weight is equal to the (a) equal to its true weight
weight of: (b) less than its true weight
(a) water displaced by the body (c) more than its true weight
(b) liquid displaced by the body (d) equal to zero
(c) equal volume of water
25. A body weights W in air and it loses its weight by 25% in
(d) equal volume of liquid
water. The relative density of the body is
18. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal
(a) 4 (b) 1/4
upthrust on them; then:
(a) both pieces must have equal weights (c) 3/4 (d) 4/3
(b) both pieces must have equal densities 26. A body floats with (1/3) of its volume outside water and
(c) both pieces must have equal volumes immersed (3/4) of its volume outside another liquid. The density of
(d) both are located at the same depth the other liquid is:
19. When a body is weighed in a liquid, the loss in its weight (a) (9/4) g/cc (b) (4/9) g/cc
depends upon: (c) (8/3) g/cc (d) (3/9) g/cc
(a) volume of the body (b) mass of the body 27. A wooden piece floats half submerged in a tub of water. If
(c) shape of the body (d) CG of the body the system is transferred to a lift ascending with
20. An iron ball is weighed in air and then in water by a spring acceleration the wooden piece will:
balance: (a) sink a little more (b) rise a little
(a) its weight in air is more than in water
(c) remain half submerged (d) sink to the bottom
(b) its weight in water is more than in air
28. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The density
(c) its weight is same both in air and water
of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body is slightly
(d) its weight is zero in water
pushed down. What will happen to the body?
21. A body weighs 40 g in air. If its volume is 10 cc, in water
(a) It will come back slowly to its earlier position.
it will weigh:
(a) 30 g (b) It will remain submerged where it is left.
(b) 40 g (c) It will sink.
(c) 50 g (d) It will come out violently.
(d) data are insufficient to calculate 29. A block of metal (density 7 g/cc) of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5
22. The reading of a spring balance when a block is suspended cm is weighed completely submerged in water. What will
from it in air is 60 N. This reading is changed to 40 N be its apparent weight (density of water = 1 g/cc)?
when the block is submerged in water. The specific gravity (a) (6 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (b) (4 × 4 × 4 × 7)g
of the block must therefore be:
(c) (7 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (d) (4 × 4 × 4 × 6)g
(a) 3 (b) 2
30. A beaker containing water weighs 100 g. It is placed on
(c) 6 (d) 3/2
the pan of a balance and a piece of metal weighing 70 g
23. A vessel with water is placed on a weighing pan and reads
and having a volume of 10 cm3 is placed inside the water
600 g. Now a ball of 40 g and density 0.80 g/cc is sunk
in the beaker. The weight of the beaker and the metal would
into the water with a pin as shown in fig., keeping it sunk.
be:
The weighing pan will show a reading.
(a) 170 g (b) 160 g
(c) 100 g (d) 30 g
31. A boy carries a fish in one hand and a bucket of water in
the other hand; if he places the fish in the bucket, the weight
now carried by him:
(a) is less than before (b) is more than before
(a) 600 g (b) 550 g (c) is the same as before (d) depends upon his speed
(c) 650 g (d) 632 g
FLUID MECHANICS 48
39. A boat carrying a number of large stones is floating in a

9 th water tank. What will happen to the water level if the stones
32. An ice cube floats on water in a beaker with of its
10 are unloaded into the water? The water level
volume submerged under water. What fraction of its (a) remains unchanged
volume will be submerged if the beaker of water is taken
th (b) rises
to the moon where the gravity is 1/6 that on the earth ?
(c) falls
(a) 9/10 (b) 27/50
(c) 2/3 (d) zero (d) rises till half the number of stones are unloaded
then begins to fall
33. When a ship floats on water:
40. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having
(a) it displaces no water
densities 1 and 2 respectively. A solid ball, made of a
(b) the weight of water displaced is equal to the weight of
material of density 3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to
the ship
equilibrium in the position shown in the fig. Which of the
(c) the weight of water displaced is lesser than the weight
following is true for 1, 2 and 3 ?
of the ship
(d) the weight of water displaced is greater than the weight
of the ship
34. A hydrogen-filled balloon stops rising after it has attained
a certain height in the sky. This happens because
(a) the atmospheric pressure decreases with height and
becomes zero when maximum height is attained
(b) the temperature of the air at maximum height equals that
of the hydrogen in the balloon
(c) viscous effects become negligible
(d) at the highest point, the density of air is such that the
buoyant force on the balloon equals its weight
35. Two solids A and B float in a liquid. It is observed that A
floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with (2/
3) of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A (a) 3 < 1 < 2 (b) 1 > 3 > 2
and B:
(c) 1 > 2 > 3 (d) 1 < 3 < 2
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3 41. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water
(w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid (l = 13.5 × 103 kg/m3) such
36. A raft of wood (density 600 g/m3) of mass 120 kg floats in
water. How much weight can be put on the raft to make it 4 1
that its th portion is in water and th portion is in
just sink? 5 5
(a) 120 kg (b) 200 kg liquid. Density of the metal is:
(c) 40 kg (d) 80 kg (a) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (b) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
37. A boat 3m long and 2 m wide is floating in a lake. When a (c) 3.5 × 103 kg/m3 (d) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
man climbs over it, it sinks 1 cm further into water. The
42. A vessel contains an immiscible mixture of water and a
mass of the man is:
liquid of density 0.8 gm/cc. A cube of side 10 cm is placed
(a) 60 kg (b) 64 kg in the mixture and it is observed that the water-liquid
(c) 70 kg (d) 72 kg interface is at the middle of cube height. Mass of the cube
38. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the is:
man drinks some water from the pond, the level of water (a) 420 gm (b) 680 gm
in the pond will: (c) 225 gm (d) 900 gm
(a) rise a little (b) sink a little
(c) remain stationary (d) none of these
FLUID MECHANICS 49
43. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in 47. An iceberg is floating partially immersed in sea water. If
water as shown in the figure. The distance h and l are shown the density of sea water is 1.03 g/cc and that of ice is 0.92
there: g/cc, the fraction of the total volume of iceberg above the
level of sea water is:
(a) 8% (b) 11%
(c) 34% (d) 89%
48. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to have a
large number of inner cavities. It weighs 9.8 kg when
weighed directly on a balance and 1.5 kg less when
immersed in water. The fraction by volume of the cavities
After sometime, the coin falls into the water. Then: in the metal ball is apporximately:
(a) both l and h increase (a) 20% (b) 30%
(b) both l and h decrease (c) 16% (d) 11%
(c) l decreases and h increases Accelerated Fluids
(d) l increases and h decreases 49. A container containing water has a constant acceleration
44. A piece of ice floats in a vessel with water above which a ‘a’ in the horizontal drection. Free surface of water gets
layer of lighter oil is poured. When the whole of ice melts, sloped with the horizontal at angle:
which one of the following statements will be true? 1  g  1  g 
(a) The level of the interface will remain the same. (a) cos   (b) sin  
a a
(b) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will rise.
1  a  1  a 
(c) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will fall while (c) tan   (d) sin  
g g
the level of interface will go up.
50. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so
(d) The level of interface as well as the total level of liquids
that the pressure at the point A of the container becomes
in the vessel will fall.
atmospheric is (the tank is of sufficient height)
45. A cubical block of side 10 cm floats at the interface of an
oil and water. The pressure above that of atmosphere at
the lower face of the block is
3 4
(a) g (b) g
2 3
4 3
(a) 200 N/m2 (b) 680 N/m2 (c) g (d) g
2 4
(c) 400 N/m2 (d) 800 N/m2 51. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density  moves with
46. A sphere of solid material of specific gravity 8 has a horizontal acceleration a as shown in the figure. The
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. Then, difference in pressure between two points A and B will be
the ratio of the radius of the cavity to the outer radius of
the sphere must be
3 3
3 5
(a) (b)
2 2
3
7 2
(c) (d) (a) hg (b) lg
3
2 7
(c) hg – la (d) hg + la
FLUID MECHANICS 50
52. A U-tube of base length ‘l’ filled with same volume of two 56. Bernoulli’s theorem is a consequence of
liquids of densities  and 2 is moving with an acceleration (a) conservation of mass
‘a’ on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between
(b) conservation of energy
the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then
the height h is given by (c) conservation of linear momentum
(d) conservation of angular momentum
57. The velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice in the
bottom of a tank does not depend upon
(a) density of liquid
(b) height of the liquid column above orifice
(c) acceleration due to gravity
(d) None of these
58. A hole is made at the bottom of the tank filled with water
a 3a (density = 1000 kg/m3). If the total pressure at the bottom
(a) 2g  (b) 2g  of the tank is three atmospheres (1 atmosphere = 105 N/
m2), then the velocity of efflux is
a 2a
(c) g  (d) 3g  (a) 400 m / s (b) 200 m / s
Miscellaneous Cases in Fluid Statics & Types of Fluid Flows & (c) 600 m / s (d) 500 m / s
Equation of Continuity & Bernoulli's Equation
53. In the given figure, the velocity v3 will be
59.  
A small hole is made at a height of h '  1 / 2 m from the
bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of
h  2 m form the upper level of water in the tank. The

distance where the water emerging from the hole strikes
the ground is
(a) 2 m/s (b) 4 m/s

(c) 1 m/s (d) 3 m/s
54. Water is flowing through two horizontal pipes of different (a) 2 2 m (b) 1 m
diameters whcih are connected together. The diameter of
the two pipes are 3 cm and 6 cm respectively. If the speed (c) 2 m (d) none of these
of water in the narrower tube is 4 m/s. Then, the speed of 60. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of area 1
water in the wider tube is : cm2 is made at the bottom of the tank. The rate of leakage
of water from the hole is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 16 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(a) 10–3 m3/s (b) 10–4 m3/s3
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s 3
(c) 10 m /s (d) 10–2 m3/s
55. A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water.
–1 61. A water tank standing on the floor has two small holes
The velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a small
punched in the vertical wall one above the other. The holes
hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is
are 2.4 cm and 7.6 cm above the floor. If the jest of water
(a) 10 (b) 20 from the holes hit the floor at the same point, then the
(c) 25.5 (d) 5 height of water in the tank is:
(a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm
(c) 20 cm (d) 48 cm
FLUID MECHANICS 51
62. The pressure of water in a pipe when tap is closed is 5.5 × 67. The ratio of the terminal velocities of two drops of radii R
105 N/m2. When tap gets open, pressure reduces to 5 × 105 and R/2 is
N/m2. The velocity with which water comes out on opening (a) 2 (b) 1
the tap is :
(c) 1/2 (d) 4
(a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
68. Units of coefficient of viscosity are
(c) 20 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) Nms–1 (b) Nm2s–1
63. A tank is filled with water up to height H. When a hole is
made at a distance h below the level of water. What will (c) Nm–2s (d) None of these
be horizontal range of water jet ? 69. The terminal velocity v of a small steel ball of radius r
falling under gravity through a column of viscous liquid
(a) 2 h (H  h) (b) 4 h (H  h)
of coeffcient of viscosity  depends on mass of the ball m,
acceleration due to gravity g, coefficient of viscossity 
(c) 4 h (H  h) (d) 2 h (H  h)
and radius r. Which of the following relations is
64. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms–1 through a horizontal dimensionally correct ?
tube of cross-sectional area 10–2m2 and you are trying to
stop the flow by your palm. Assuming that the water stops mgr
(a) v  (b) v  mgr
immediately after hitting the palm, the minimum force that 
you must exert should be (density of water = 103 kgm–3).
(a) 15 N (b) 22.5 N mg mg
(c) v  (d) v 
(c) 33.7 N (d) 45 N r 
65. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length l = 2.5 m rotates 70. A rain drop of radius r falls in air with a terminal speed vt.
with a constant anglular velocity   5rad s about a What is the terminal speed of a rain drop of radius 2r ?
stationary vertical axis OO’ passing through the end A. (a) vt/2 (b) vt
Initially the tube is filled with an ideal fluid. The end A of (c) 2vt (d) 4vt
the tube is open, the closed end B has a very small of
orifice. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s) relative to 71. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass and radius are
–1
the tube when the liquid column length in tube reduces to falling down with a terminal speed of 6 cm s . If they
h = 1 m. coalesce to form one big drop, what will be its terminal
speed ? Neglect the buoyancy due to air.
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 cms (b) 6 cms
–1 –1
(c) 24 cms (d) 32 cms
72. Two equal drops of water are falling through air with a
steady velocity v. If the drops coalesce, then new velocity
will be :
(a) 2 v (b) 2v
v
(c) 22/3 v (d)
Applications of Fluid Dynamics & Viscosity 2
66. Spherical balls of radius R are falling in a viscous fluid of 73. As the temperature of water increases, its viscosity
viscosity  with a velocity . The retarding viscous force
(a) remains unchanged
acting on the spherical ball is
(a) directly proportional to R but inversely proportional to . (b) decreases
(b) directly proportional to both radius R and velocity . (c) increases

(c) inversely proportional to both radius R and velocity . (d) increases or decreases depending on the external
(d) inversely proportional to R but directly proportional pressure
to velocity .
FLUID MECHANICS 52
74. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r, length l, 80. Two small drops of mercury each of radius r form a single
whose ends are maintained at a pressure difference p is large drop. The ratio of surface energy before and after
this change is :
Qpr 4
V , where  is coefficient of the viscosity and Q (a) 2 : 22/3 (b) 22/3 : 1

(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
is :
81. Which of the following is not the unit of surface tension?
(a) 8 (b) 1/8
(a) Newton/metre (b) Joule/(metre)2
(c) 16 (d) 1/16
(c) kg/(second)2 (d) 3Watt/metre
75. A viscous fluid is flowing through a cylindrical tube. The
82. Surface tension is due to
velocity distribution of the fluid is best represented by the
diagram (a) friction forces between molecules
(b) cohesive forces between molecules
(c) adhesive forces between molecules
(a) (b) (d) gravitational forces
83. The spiders and insects move and run on the surface of
water without sinking, because
(a) elastic membrane is formed on water due to property
(c) (d) None of these of surface tension
(b) spiders and insects are lighter
76. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density (c) spiders and insects swim on water
–3 –1
= 19.5 kgm ) is 0.2 ms in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 (d) spiders and insects experience upthrust
–3
kgm ), find the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (density 84. Small droplets of liquid are usually more spherical in shape
–3
= 10.5 kg/m ) of the same size in the same liquid. than larger drops of the same liquid because
(a) force of surface tension is equal and opposite to the
–1 –1
(a) 0.4 ms (b) 0.133 ms force of gravity
(c) 0.1 ms
–1
(d) 0.2 ms
–1 (b) force of surface tension predominates the force of
3 gravity
77. The terminal speed of a sphere of god (density 19.5 × 10
–3 3 –3 (c) force of gravity predominates the force of surface
kgm ) in a viscous liquid (density 1.5 × 10 kg m ) is 0.2
–1 tension
ms . What is the terminal speed (in m/s) of a sphere of
3 –3
silver 9density 10.5 × 10 kg m ) of the same size in the (d) force of gravity and force of surface tension act in the
same liquid? same direction and are equal
85. Hair of shaving brush cling together when it is removed
Surface Tension
from water due to
78. The water droplets in free fall are spherical due to (a) force of attraction between hair
(a) gravity (b) surface tension
(b) viscosity (c) viscosity of water
(c) surface tension (d) characteristic property of hair
(d) intermolecular attraction 86. Two water droplets coalesce to form a large drop. In this
process,
79. Tiny insects can float and walk on the surface of water
due to (a) energy is liberated
(a) buoyancy alone (b) energy is absorbed
(c) energy is neither liberated nor absorbed
(b) surface tension alone
(d) a small amount of mass is converted into energy in
(c) both buoyancy and surface tension
accordance with Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence
2
(d) neither buoyancy nor surface tension relation E = mc .
FLUID MECHANICS 53
6
87. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 10 drops of 95. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is
equal size. The energy expended in joule is (surface tension p = 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
–3 –1
of mercury is 460 × 10 Nm ) What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the
(a) 0.057 (b) 5.7 same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution?
–4 –6
(c) 5.7 × 10 (d) 5.7 × 10  2
(a) (b)
88. If work W is done in blowing a bubble of radius R from r r
soap solution, then the work done in blowing a bubble of
radius 2R from the same solution is 4
(c) (d) none of these
(a) W/2 (b) 2W r
96. Two soap bubbles of radii r1 and r2 equal to 4cm and 5cm
1
(c) 4W (d) 2 W are touching each other over a common surface S1S2
3
(shown in figure). Its radius will be :
89. If the surface tension of soap Sol. is , what is the work
done in blowing soap bubble of radius r ?
2 2
(a) r  (b) 2r 
2 2
(c) 4r  (d) 8r 
90. The average mass of rain drops is 3.0×10–5 kg and their
average terminal velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy
transferred by rain to each square metre of the surface at a
place which receives 100 cm of rain in a year. (a) 4 cm (b) 20 cm
4 5
(a) 4.05 ×10 J (b) 3.5 ×10 J (c) 5 cm (d) 4.5 cm
4 5
(c) 9.0 ×10 J (d) 3.0 ×10 J Angle of Contact
91. The work done to break up a drop of a liquid of radius R 97. If the angle of contact is less than 90°, then pressure just
and surface tension  into eight drops, all of the same size, is inside the surface of a meniscus
2 2
(a) 4R (b) 2R (a) is less than atmospheric pressure
1 1 (b) is greater than atmospheric pressure

2 2
(c) R (d) R (c) is same as the atmospheric pressure
2 4
Excess Pressure (d) none of these
92. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected by a 98. Water does not wet an oily glass, because
tube (a) cohesive force of oil > adhesive force between oil and
(a) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller bubble glass
till the sizes become equal (b) cohesive force of oil > cohesive force of water
(b) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble till (c) oil repels water
the sizes are interchanged (d) cohesive force of water > adhesive force between water
(c) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger and oil molecules
(d) there is no flow of air. 99. A glass plate is partly dipped vertically in the mercury and
93. If two soaps bubbles of equal radii r coalesce, then the angle of contact is measured. If the plate is inclined, then
radius of curvature of interface between two bubble will the angle of contact will
be: (a) increase (b) remain unchanged
(a) r (b) 0 (c) increase or decrease (d) decrease
(c) infinity (d) r/2 100. A liquid wets a solid completely. The meniscus of the liquid
94. The excess pressure due to surface tension in a spherical in a sufficiently long tube is
liquid drop of radius r is directly proportional to (a) flat (b) concave
(a) r (b) r 2 (c) convex (d) cylindrical
–1 –2
(c) r (d) r
FLUID MECHANICS 54
101. If a capillary tube is dippped into liquid and the levels of 104. Two capillary tubes of the same length but different radii r1
the liquid inside and outside are same, then the angle of and r2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The
contact is : pressure head is p. What should be the radius of a single
(a) 0° (b) 90° tube that can replace the two tubes so that the rate of flow
is same as before ?
(c) 45° (d) 30°
Capillarity r1r1
(a) r1 + r2 (b) r  r
102. When two capillary tubes of different diameters are dipped 1 2
vertically, then rise of the liquid is:
(a) same in both the tubes r1  r2
(b) more in the tube of larger diameter 2
(c) less in the tube of smaller diameter 105. A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water
(d) more in the tube of smaller diameter rises upto 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put in a freely
falling elevator, the length of water column in the capillary
103. Water rises to a height h in a capillary tube held vertically
tube will be
in a beaker containing water. If the capillary tube is inclined
at an angle 30° with the water surface, the length to which (a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm
water rises in the capillary will be (c) 4 cm (d) 20 cm
(a) h/2 (b) h
2h
(c) (d) 2h
3
FLUID MECHANICS 55
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A large number of water drops, each of radius r, combine 4. When two soap bubbles of radii a and b (b > a) coalesce,
to have a drop of radius R. If the surface tension is T and the radius of curvature of common surface is : (2021)
mechanical equivalent of heat is J, the rise in heat energy
ab ab
per unit volume will be : (2021) (a) (b)
ba ab
2T 2T  1 1 
(a) (b)   
rJ J r R ba ab
(c) (d)
ab ab
3T  1 1 
(c)    (d) none of these 5. A hydraulic press can lift 100 kg when a mass ‘m’ is placed
J r R
on the smaller piston. It can lift ____ kg when the diameter
5
2. The pressure acting on a submarine is 3×10 Pa at a certain of the large piston is increased by 4 times and that of the
depth. If the depth is doubled, the percentage increase in smaller piston is decreased by 4 times keeping the same
the pressure acting on the submarine would be : mass ‘m’ on the smaller piston. (2021)
(Assume that atmospheric pressure 1105 Pa density of 6. Consider a water tank as shown in the figure. Its cross-
2
sectional area is 0.4 m . The tank has an opening B near the
3 –3 2
water is 10 kg m , g  10ms ) (2021) 2
bottom whose cross-section area is 1 cm . A load of 24 kg
is applied on the water at the top when the height of the
3 200 water level is 40 cm above the bottom, the velocity of water
(a) % (b) %
200 5
1
coming out the opening B is ms . Find the value of v
(round off to the nearest integer)
200 5
(c) % (d) % –2
3 200 [Take value of g to be 10 ms ] (2021)
3. What will be the nature of flow of water from a circular tap,

when its flow rate increased from 0.18 L/min? The radius of
–3
the tap and viscosity of water are 0.5 cm and 10 Pa s.
respectively. (2021)
3 3
(Density of water : 10 kg/m )
(a) Remains turbulent flow
(b) Steady flow to unsteady flow
(c) unsteady to steady flow
(d) Remains steady flow

FLUID MECHANICS 56
7. The velocity of small ball of mass ‘m’ and density d1 , [Given: Density of water  1000kg / m3 ]
when dropped in a container filled with glycerin, (JEE Main 2022)
becomes constant after some time. If the density of (a) 300 N (b) 500 N
glycerine is d 2 , then the viscous form acting on the (c) 250 N (d) 400 N
ball, will be: (JEE Main 2022) 13. Consider a cylindrical tank of radius 1m is filled with
 d  d  water. The top surface of water is at 15 m from the
(a) mg 1  1  (b) mg  1  1 bottom of the cylinder. There is a hole on the wall of
 d2  d
 2  cylinder at a height of 5m from the bottom. A force of
d  d  5  105 N is applied an the top surface of water using a
(c) mg  1  1 (d) mg  2  1
 d2   d1  piston. The speed of efflux from the hole will be:
8. If p is the density and  is coefficient of viscosity of (given atmospheric pressure PA  1.01 105 Pa ,
fluid which flows with a speed v in the pipe of density of water  w  1000kg / m3 and gravitational
diameter d, the correct formula for Reynolds number acceleration g  10m / s 2 ) (JEE Main 2022)
Re is: (JEE Main 2022)
d v
(a) Re  (b) Re 
v d
 vd 
(c) Re  (d) Re 
  vd
9. A water drop of radius 1 m falls in a situation where
the effect of buoyant force is negligible. Co-efficient
of viscosity of air is 1.8 105 Nsm 2 and its density is (a) 11.6 m/s (b) 10.8 m/s
negligible as compared to that of water 106 gm3 . (c) 17.8 m/s (d) 14.4 m/s
Terminal velocity of the water drop is: (Take 14. A drop of liquid of density  is floating half
2
acceleration due to gravity  10ms ) immersed in a liquid of density  and surface tension
(JEE Main 2022) 7.5  104 Ncm1 . The radius of drop in cm will be:
6 1
(a) 145.4 10 ms (Take: g  10m / s 2 ) (JEE Main 2022)
6 1
(b) 118.0 10 ms 15 15
(c) 132.6 106 ms 1 (a) (b)
2    
(d) 123.4 106 ms 1
3 3
10. A water drop of diameter 2cm is broken into 64 equal (c) (d)
2   20 2   
droplets. The surface tension of water is 0.075 N/m. In
this process the gain in surface energy will be: 15. An ideal fluid of density 800kgm 3 , flows smoothly
(JEE Main 2022) through a bent pipe (as shown in figure) that tapers in
4
(a) 2.8  10 J (b) 1.5  103 J a
cross-sectional area from a to . The pressure
(c) 1.9 104 J (d) 9.4  105 J 2
11. A water drop of radius 1cm is broken into 729 equal difference between the wide and narrow sections of
droplets. If surface tension of water is 75 dyne/cm, pipe is 4100 Pa. At wider section, the velocity of fluid
then the gain in surface energy upto first decimal place x 1
will be: [Given π = 3.14] (JEE Main 2022) is ms for x  _____ . (Give g  10ms 2 )
6
(a) 8.5 104 J (b) 8.2 10 4 J (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 7.5  104 J (d) 5.3 104 J
12. A pressure-pump has a horizontal tube of cross-
sectional area 10cm 2 for the outflow of water at a
speed of water at a speed of 20 m/s. The force exerted
on the vertical wall just in front of the tube which
stops water horizontally flowing out of the tube, is:
FLUID MECHANICS 57
16. A liquid of density 750kgm 3 flows smoothly through (JEE Main 2023)
a horizontal pipe that tapers in cross-sectional area (a) 16 (b) 6
(c) 8 (d) 10
A
from A1  1.2  10 2 m 2 to A2  1 . The pressure 23. The height of liquid column raised in a capillary tube
2
of certain radius when dipped in liquid A vertically is,
difference between the wide and narrow sections of the
5cm. If the tube is dipped in a similar manner in
pipe is 4500 Pa. The rate of flow of liquid is _______
another liquid B of surface tension and density double
103 m 2 s 1 . (JEE Main 2022) the values of liquid A, the height of liquid column
17. A small spherical ball of radius 0.1 mm and density raised in liquid B would be m. (JEE Main 2023)
104 kgm 3 falls freely under gravity through a distance (a) 0.20 (b) 0.5
h before entering a tank of water. If, after entering the (c) 0.05 (d) 0.10
water the velocity of ball does not change and it 24. If 1000 droplets of water of surface tension 0.07N/m.
continue to fall with same constant velocity inside having same radius 1mm each, combine to from a
water, then the value of h will be _____ m. (Given single drop. In the process the released surface energy
g  10ms 2 viscosity of water  1.0  10 5 N  sm 2 ) is- (JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2022) (a) 7.92 × 10–6 J (b) 7.92 × 10–4 J
18. A spherical soap bubble of radius 3 cm is formed (c) 9.68 × 10–4 J (d) 8.8 × 10–5 J
inside another spherical soap bubble of radius 6 cm. If 25. A mercury drop of radius 103 m is broken into 125
the internal pressure of the smaller bubble of radius 3 equal size droplets. Surface tension of mercury is
cm in the above system is equal to the internal pressure 0.45 Nm 1 . The gain in surface energy is:
of the another single soap bubble of radius r cm. The (JEE Main 2023)
value of r is……. (JEE Main 2022) (a) 2.26  105 J (b) 28 10 5 J
19. The diameter of an air bubble which was initially 2 (c) 17.5 105 J (d) 5 105 J
26. A small ball of mass M and density ρ is dropped in a
mm, rises steadily through a solution of density
viscous liquid of density ρ0. After some time, the ball
1750kg m 3 at the rate of 0.35cms 1 . The coefficient falls with a constant velocity. What is the viscous force
of viscosity of the solution is _______ poise (in on the ball? (JEE Main 2023)
nearest integer). (the density of air is negligible).   
(a) F  Mg 1  0 
(JEE Main 2022)   
20. A tube of length 50 cm is filled completely with an   
incompressible liquid of mass 250 g and closed at both (b) F  Mg 1  0 
  
ends. The tube is then rotated in horizontal plane about
one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity (c) F  Mg 1  0 
x F rad s 1 . If F be the force exerted by the liquid at   

(d) F  Mg 1  
the other end then the value of x will be ______.  0 
(JEE Main 2022) 27. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as
Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R
Assertion A: When you squeeze one end of a tube to
21. Surface tension of a soap bubble is 2.0 × 10–2 Nm–1.
get toothpaste out from the other end, Pascal's
Work done to increase the radius of soap bubble from principle is observed.
3.5 cm to 7 cm will be : [Take π = 22/7] Reason R: A change in the pressure applied to an
(JEE Main 2023) enclosed incompressible fluid is transmitted
(a) 0.72 × 10–4 J (b) 5.76 × 10–4 J undiminished to every portion of the fluid and to the
–4
(c) 18.48 × 10 J (d) 9.24 × 10–4 J walls of its container.
22. A fully loaded boeing aircraft has a mass of In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below
5.4  105 kg . Its total wing area is 500m 2 . It is in level (JEE Main 2023)
flight with a speed of 1080km / h . If the density of air (a) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct
explanation of A
 is 1.2kgmm 3 , the fractional increase in the speed
(b) A is not correct but R is correct
of the air on the upper surface of the wing relative to (c) Both A and R are correct but R is the correct
the lower surface in percentage will be  g  10m / s 2  explanation of A
(d) A is correct but R is not correct
FLUID MECHANICS 58
28. Given below are two statements: moves with a constant speed. If the viscosity of the
Statement I: Pressure in a reservoir of water is same liquid is 5.0  103 Pl , the speed of block is 103 m / s
at all points at the same level of water. (JEE Main 2023)
Statement II: The pressure applied to enclosed water
is transmitted in all directions equally.
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
answer from the options given below:
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are false 34. The surface of water in a water tank of cross section
(c) Statement I is false but Statement II is true area 750cm 2 on the top of a house is hm. above the
(d) Both Statement I and Statement II are true tap level. The speed of water coming out through the
29. Eight equal drops of water are falling through air with
tap of cross section area 500mm 2 is 30cm / s . At that
a steady speed of 10 cm/s. If the drops coalesce, the
dh
new velocity is:- (JEE Main 2023) instant, is x 10 3 m / s . The value of x will be
(a) 5 cm/s (b) 16 cm/s dt
(c) 40 cm/s (d) 10 cm/s (JEE Main 2023)
30. 35. An air bubble of diameter 6 mm rises steadily through
a solution of density 1750 kg/m3 at the rate of 0.35
cm/s. The co-efficient of viscosity of the solution
(neglect density of air) is _________ Pas (given, g =
10 ms–2). (JEE Main 2023)
36. Figure below shows a liquid being pushed out of the
The figure shows a liquid of given density flowing
tube by a piston having area of cross section 2.0 cm2.
steadily in horizontal tube of varying cross - section.
The area of cross section at the outlet is 10 mm2. If the
Cross sectional areas at A is 1.5 cm2, and B is 25 mm2,
piston is pushed at a speed of 4 cm s–1, the speed of
if the speed of liquid at B is 60 cm/s then (PA – PB) is:
outgoing fluid is ______ cm s–1
(Given PA and PB are liquid pressures at A and B
points. density ρ = 1000 kg m–3
A and B are on the axis of tube (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 135 Pa (b) 36 Pa
(JEE Main 2023)
(c) 175 Pa (d) 27 Pa
37. The surface tension of soap solution is 3.5 × 10–2 Nm–
31. A Spherical ball of radius 1mm and density 10.5 g/cc 1
. The amount of work done required to increase the
is dropped in glycerine of coefficient of viscosity 9.8
radius of soap bubble from 10 cm to 20 cm is
poise and density 1.5 g/cc. Viscous force on the ball
_________ × 10–4 J.
when it attains constant velocity is 3696 × 10–x N. The
(take π = 22/7) (JEE Main 2023)
value of x is
38. Glycerin of density 1.25×103kg m–3 is flowing through
(Given, g = 9.8 m/s2 and π = 22/7) (JEE Main 2023)
the conical section of pipe. The area of cross-section of
32. A spherical drop of liquid splits into 1000 identical
the pipe at its ends are 10 cm2 and 5 cm2 and pressure
spherical drops. If ui is the surface energy of the
drop across its length is 3 NM-2. The rate of flow of
original drop and u f is the total surface energy of the glycerin through the pipe is x×10-5 m3s-1. The value of
resulting drops, the (ignoring evaporation). x is ______. (JEE Main 2023)
u f  10  39. There is an air bubble of radius 1.0 mm in a liquid of
   . The value of x is _____. surface tension 0.075 Nm–1 and density 1000 kg m–3 at
ui  x 
a depth of 10 cm below the free surface. The amount
(JEE Main 2023)
by which the pressure inside the bubble is greater than
33. A metal block of base area 0.20m 2 is placed on a the atmospheric pressure is _________ Pa
table, as shown in figure. A liquid film of thickness (g = 10ms–2) (JEE Main 2023)
0.25mm is inserted between the block and the table.
The block is pushed by a horizontal force of 0.1N and
FLUID MECHANICS 59
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 4. Two immiscible liquids P and Q of different densities are
1. Two communicating vessels contain mercury. The diameter contained in a wide U-tube as shown in fig. The heights of
of one vessel is four times the diameter of the other. A the two liquids above the horizontal line XX` which cuts
column of water of height h0 = 70 cm is poured into the the boundary between the liquids are H P and H Q
left hand vessel (the narrower one). How much will be respectively. The U-tube is transported to a planet where
mercury level rise in the right hand vessel? (Specific the acceleration of free fall is 2/3 that on the earth, where
density of mercury = 13.6) the liquids do not evaporate and where the heights of liquid
(measured relative to XX`) are hP and hQ respectively.
(a) 0.3 cm (b) 0.7 cm
Which of the given statements is correct?
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 1.0 cm
2. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil, which does not
mix with water, is next poured into one side until water
rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be
0.8, the oil level will stand higher than the water level by:
(a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm
(c) 31.25 cm (d) 20 cm
3. The limbs of a glass U-tube are lowered into vessels A and
B, A containing water. Some air is pumped out through (a) The liquid levels are unchanged, i.e.,
the top of the tube C. The liquid in the left hand limb A hP = HP and hQ = HQ
and the right hand limb B rise to heights of 10 cm and 12
(b) Both liquid levels rise up so that hP/HP = hQ/HQ
cm respectively. The density of liquid B is:
(c) Both liquid levels rise up so that h P - h Q
= HP - HQ
(d) The liquid P falls and liquid Q rises such that
hP 2 HP

hQ 3 HQ
2
5. A tank with a square base of area 2.0 m is divided into two
compartments by a vertical partition in the middle. There is
2
a small hinged door of face area 20 cm at the bottom of the
partition. Water is filled in one compartment and an acid of
(a) 0.75 g/cm3 (b) 0.83 g/cm3 relative density 1.5 in the other, both to a height of 4 m. If
–2
g = 10 ms , the force necessary to keep the door closed is
(c) 1.2 g/cm3 (d) 0.25 g/cm3
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N
FLUID MECHANICS 60
6. A ball is made of a material of density  where oil <  < 8. A cubical block of steel of each side equal to  is floating
water with oil and water representing the densities of oil and on mercury in a vessel. The densities of steel and mercury
water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible. If are s and m. The height of the block above the mercury
the above ball is in equilibrium in mixture of this oil and level is given by
water, which of the following pictures represents its
equilibrium position ?      
(a)  1  s  (b)  1  s 
  m    m 
     
(c)  1  m 
 (d)  1  m 

 s   s 
9. The tension in a string holding a solid block below the

surface of a liquid (where liquid > block) as in shown in the
figure is T when the system is at rest.
Then what will be the tension in the string if the system

has upward acceleration a?
 a  a
(a) T 1   (b) T 1  
 g  g
7. A cube of mass m and density D is suspended form the
point P by a spring of stiffness k. The system is kept inside a  a
a beaker filled with a liquid of density d. The elongation (c) T   1 (d) g T
g 
in the spring, assuming D > d, is
10. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a
spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A stone of mass
3
0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m is immersed in water without
touching the walls of the beaker. What will be the balance
reading now?
(a) 2 kg (b) 2.5 kg
(c) 1 kg (d) 3 kg
11. An ornament weighing 36 g in air weighs only 34 g in
water. Assuming that some copper is mixed with gold to
prepare the ornament, find the amount of copper in it.
Specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9.
(a) 2.2 g (b) 4.4 g
mg  d mg  D 
(a) 1   (b) 1   (c) 1.1 g (d) 3.6 g
k  D k  d
mg  d
(c) 1   (d) none of these
k  D 
FLUID MECHANICS 61
12. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross- Passage

sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical from Using the following Passage, solve Q. 18 & 19
a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half
A rod of length 6 m has a mass 12 kg. It is hinged at one
submerged in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position.
end A at a distance of 3 m below the water surface. The
The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is
specific gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
Mg Mg  LA 
(a) (b) 1  
k k  M 
Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
(c) 1   (d) 1  
k  2M  k  M 
13. A long metal rod of length  and relative density  is held
vertically with its lower end just touching the surface of
water. The speed of the rod when it just sinks in water is
given by 18. What weight must be attached to the other end B so that 5
m of the rod is immersed in water?
(a) 2g (b) 2g
(a) 7 kgf (b) 20kgf
 1  7 7
(c) 2g 1   (d) 2g  2  1 (c) kgf (d) kgf
 2  5 2
14. A large block of ice 5m thick has a vertical hole drilled 19. Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by
through it and is floating in the middle of a lake. The the hinge on the rod.
minimum length of the rope required to scoop up bucket
17
full of water through the hole is (a) kgf in the downward direction
3
(the relative density of ice = 0.9)
(a) 1 m (b) 0.9 m (b) 8 kgf in the downward direction
(c) 0.5 m (d) 0.45 m (c) 4 kgf in the downward direction
15. If a sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water (d) 5 kgf in the downward direction
and 120 g in a liquid: 20. When at rest, a liquid stands at the same level in the tubes
(i) RD of metal is 3 (ii) RD of metal is 7 as shown in the figure. But as indicated, a height difference
(iii) RD of liquid is 3 (iv) RD of liquid is (1/3) h occurs when the system is given an acceleration a towards
the right. Then h is equal to
(a) (i, ii) (b) (i, iii)
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
–3
16. A vessel contains oil of density 0.8 gcm floating over
–3
mercury of density 13.6 gcm . A homogeneous sphere
floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
–3
other half in oil. The density of the sphere in gcm is
(a) 3.3 (b) 6.4
(c) 7.2 (d) 12.8
17. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and a chunk
of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened together.
The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which aL gL
(a) 2g (b)
makes the combination to float with its entire volume 2a
submerged in water is:
(a) 1/5 (b) 1/3 gL aL
(c) (d) g
(c) 3/5 (d) 2/5 a
FLUID MECHANICS 62
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS 27. Two bodies with volumes V and 2V are equalized on a
Passage balance. The larger body is then immersed in oil of density
d1 = 0.9 g/cm3 while the smaller body is immersed in
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 21 to Q. 26
another liquid when it is found that the equilibrium of the
If the container filled with liquid gets accelerated balance is not disturbed. The density of the second liquid
horizontally or vertically, pressure in liquids gets changed. is then:
In case of horizontally accelerated liquid (ax), the free
(a) 2.4 g/cm3 (b) 1.8 g/cm3
surface has the slope ax/g. In case of vertically accelerated
liquid (ay) for calculation of pressure, effective g is used. (c) 0.45 g/cm3 (d) 2.7 g/cm3
A closed box with horizontal base 6 m by 6m and a height 28. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way
2m is half filled with liquid. It is given constant horizontal that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level.
acceleration g/2 and vertical downward acceleration g/2. The open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the
21. The angle of the free surface with the horizontal is equal to tube is raised vertically up by additional 46 cm. What will
–1 be length of the air column above mercury in the tube now?
(a) 30 (b) tan (2/3)
–1 (Atmospheric pressure - 76 cm of Hg)
(c) tan (1/3) (d) 45º
(a) 22 cm (b) 38 cm
22. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is released on an
inclined surface of angle  as shown in the figure. The (c) 6 cm (d) 16 cm
friction coefficient of surface with vessel is  (< tan ). 29. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids
Then the constant angle made by the surface of water with which do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in
the incline will be the tube. Each liquid subtends 90° angle at centre. Radius
joining their interface makes an angle  with vertical.
d1
Ratio d is :
2
–1 –1
(a) tan  (b)  – tan 
–1 –1
(c)  + tan  (d) cot 
23. Length of exposed portion of top of box is equal to -
(a) 2m (b) 3m
(c) 4m (d) 2.5 m
24. Water pressure at the bottom of centre of box is equal to
(atmospheric pressure = 105 N / m 2 , density of water = 1  cos  1  tan 
(a) (b)
3 2
1  cos  1  tan 
1000 kg / m , g  10 m / sec )
(a) 1.1 MPa (b) 0.11 MPa 1  sin  1  sin 
(c) (d)
1  cos  1  sin 
(c) 0.101 MPa (d) 0.011 MPa
25. Maximum value of water pressure in the box is equal to - 30. Two identical cylindrical vessels, each of base area A, have
their bases at the same horizontal level. They contain a
(a) 1.4 MPa (b) 0.14 MPa
liquid of density . In one vessel the height of the liquid is
(c) 0.104 MPa (d) 0.014 MPa
h1 and in the other h2 > h1. When the two vessels are
26. What is the value of vertical acceleration of box for given connected, the work done by gravity in equalizing the levels
horizontal acceleration (g/2), so that no part of bottom of is
box is exposed - 2 2
(a) 2 Ag (h2 – h1) (b) Ag (h2 – h1)
(a) g/2 upward (b) g/2 downward
1 2 1 2
(c) g/4 upward (d) not possible (c) Ag  h 2  h1  (d) Ag  h 2  h1 
2 4
FLUID MECHANICS 63
31. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and lengths 35. Water stands at level A in the arrangement shown in figure.
a and b respectively are held horizontally. The volume of What will happen if a jet of air is gently blown into the
water flowing per second through tube A is Qa when the horizontal tube in the direction shown in the figure ?
pressure difference across its ends is maintained at P. When
the same pressure difference is maintained across tube B,
the volume of water flowing per second through it is Qb.
The ratio Qa/Qb is
2
b  ra  b  ra 
(a)   (b)  
a  rb  a  rb 
3 4
b  ra  b  ra 
(c)   (d)  
a  rb  a  rb 
32. Two capillary tubes A and B of equal radii ra = rb = r and

equal lengths a = b =  are held horizontally. When the
same pressure difference P is maintained across each tube, (a) Water will rise above A in the capillary
the rate of flow of water in each is Q. If the tubes are
(b) Water will fall below A in the capillary tube
connected in series and the same pressure difference P is
maintained across the combination, the rate of flow through (c) There will be no effect on the level of water in the
the combination will be capillary tube.
(d) Air will emerge from end B in the form of bubbles.
(a) Q/2 (b) Q
36. Tanks A and B open at the top contain two different liquids
(c) 2Q (d) none of these upto certain height in them. A hole is made to the wall of
33. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, each tank at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of the liquid. The
the flow speeds on the lower and upper surfaces of the area of the hole in A is twice that of in B. If the liquid mass
flux through each hole is equal, then the ratio of the
wing are v and 2 v respectively. If the density of air is 
densities of the liquids respectively, is
and the surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift on (a) 2/1 (b) 3/2
the wing is given by
(c) 2/3 (d) 1/2
1 1 2 37. In the diagram shown, the difference in the two tubes of
(a) v 2 A (b) v A the manometer is 5 cm, the cross section of the tube at A
2 2
and B is 6 mm2 and 10 mm2 respectively. The rate at which
2
(c) 2 v A (d) 2 v 2 A water flows through the tube is :
(g = 10 ms–2)
34. In a cylindrical water tank there are two small holes Q and
P on the wall at a depth of h1 form upper level of water and
at a height of h2 from the lower end of the tank respectively
as shown in the figure. Water coming out from both the
holes strike the ground at the same point. The ratio of h1
and h2 is
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) > 1 (d) < 1
(a) 10.0 cc/s (b)8.0 cc/s

(c) 7.5 cc/s (d) 12.5 cc/s
FLUID MECHANICS 64
38. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one 42. Figure shows two holes in a wide tank containing a liquid
end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed column. The water streams coming out of these holes strike
of flow of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of ejection the ground at the same point. The height of liquid column
of the liquid through the holes is in the tank is
1/ 2
VR VR
(a)   (b)  
nr nr 
3/ 2 2
VR VR
(c)   (d)  
nr  nr 
39. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an
–1
initial speed of 1.0 ms . The cross-sectional area of the (a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm
–4 2
tap is 10 m . Assume that the pressure is constant (c) 9.8 cm (d) 980 cm
throughout the stream of water and that the flow is steady. 43. A siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as
The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.15 m below the shown in the figure.
–2
tap is (take g = 10 ms )
–4 2 –5 2
(a) 5.0 × 10 m (b) 1.0 × 10 m
–5 2 –5 2
(c) 5.0 × 10 m (d) 2.0 × 10 m
40. The figure shows a liquid of density  flowing through a
tube with velocity v. The h1 and h2 are the heights of liquid
in the straight and L-shaped tubes, respectively. Choose
the correct statements.
(a) The pressure at the point A is gh1

(b) The pressure at the point B is gh2
(c) The velocity of flow is, v  2gh 2
(d) The velocity of flow is, v  2g  h 2  h1 

41. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a
vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2 and
as shown in the figure is
If the tube is initially filled with liquid, then the speed of
the liquid through the siphon is
(a) 2gy (b) 2g  h  y 
(c) 2g  H  h  y  (d) none of the above
44. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal

–3
diameter 8 × 10 m. The velocity as it leaves the tap is
–1
0.4 ms . The water diameter of the water stream at a
–1
distance 2 × 10 m below the tap is close to
–3 –3
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 9.6 × 10 m
–3 –3
(a) 6gh (b) 2 gh (c) 3.6 × 10 m (d) 5.0 × 10 m
(c) 2 2gh (d) gh

FLUID MECHANICS 65
Passage 49. If a number of identical droplets of water, each of radius r,

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 45 to 56 coalesce to form a single drop of radius R, the resulting
2 rise in the temperature of water is given by (here  is the
A cylindrical tank having cross sectional area A = 0.5 m
–3 density of water, s its specific heat and  its surface tension)
is filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m and
–3
2 = 600 kg m , to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in the  1 1  3  1 1 
2
figure. A small whole having area a = 5 cm is made in (a)    (b)   
s r R s  r R 
right vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A
horizontal force F is applied on the tank to tank to keep it  1 1  3  1 1 
in static equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal (c)    (d)   
s  r R  s  r R 
surface. Neglect mass of cylindrical tank in comparison to
mass of liquids (take g = 10 ms ).
–2 Multiple Choice Questions
50. The liquid in the capillary tube will rise, if the angle of
contact is
(a) 0° (b) 90°
(c) obtuse (d) acute
51. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the
height of the water column is x. When this arrangement is
taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column
is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio x/y is
45. The velocity of efflux is (a) (1 – d/R) (b) (1 + d/R)
–1 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 20 ms (c) (R – d/R + d) (d) (R + d/R – d)
–1 –1
(c) 4 ms (d) 35 ms 52. The figure shows a container filled with a liquid of density
46. Horizontal force F to keep the cylinder in static . Four points A, B, C and D lie on the vertices of a vertical
equilibrium, if it is placed on a smooth horizontal plane, square. Points A and C lie on a vertical line and points B
is and D lies on a horizontal line. Choose the correct
statement(s) about the pressure at the four points.
(a) 7.2 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15.5 N (d) 20.4 N
47. A tiny sphere of mass m and density x is dropped in a tall jar
of glycerine of density y. When the sphere acquires terminal
velocity, the magnitude of the viscious force acting on it is
(a) mgx/y (b) mgy/x (a) PD = PB (b) PA < PB = PD < PC
(c) mg (1 – y/x) (d) mg (1 + x/y)
PC  PA PC  PA
48. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of (c) PD  PB  (d) PD  PB 
2 2
density 1 . It is falling through a liquid of density
53. Equal volumes of liquid are poured in the three vessels A,
2. (2 < 1). [Assume that the liquid applies a viscous
B and C (h1 < h2 < h3). All the vessels have same base area.
force on the ball that is proportional to the square of its Select the correct alternatives.
2
speed , ie, Fviscous = –kv (k > 0). The terminal speed
of the ball is
Vg 1   2  Vg 1
(a) (b)
k k
(a) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel A.
Vg 1 Vg (1   2 ) (b) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel C.
(c) (d)
k k
(c) Net force exerted by the liquid in all the three vessels
is equal.
(d) Net force exerted by the liquid in vessel A is maximum.
FLUID MECHANICS 66
54. A spherical pot is more than half filled with water as shown 57. The tank shown in figure has the base area ( × b). It is
in the figure. Choose the correct statement(s) about the filled with a liquid of density  to a height H. Choose the
forces exerted by water on the pot. correct alternative (s).
(a) It is always normal to the surface of pot.

(b) Everywhere it acts in the downward direction. (a) The force at the base of the container is,
(c) The net horizontal force on the pot is zero. F = 1/2gH ( + 2H cot ) b.
(d) The net vertical force on the pot is in the downward
(b) The horizontal component of the force acting on the
direction. 2
inclined wall is Fh = 1/2 gH b
In vertical direction liquid will exert its weight.
(c) The vertical component of the force acting on the
55. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas of
cross section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the 1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cos ec.
sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric 2
pressure.
(d) The vertical component of the force acting on the
1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cot .
2
58. An open vessel containing liquid is moving with constant
acceleration a on a levelled horizontal surface. For this
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
(a) The pressure at the base of the vessel is 2hg.

(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel
is 2hgA2.
(c) The weight of the liquid is < 2hgA2.
(d) The walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward
force hg(A2–A1) on the liquid.
56. A wall of length  supports water to a height h as shown (a) The maximum pressure is at the leftmost bottom
figure. Choose the correct statement(s). Take  as the corner.
density of water. (b) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
from left to right the pressure decreases.
(c) The pressure at all points on a line making an angle
1  a 
of tan   with horizontal would be same.
g
(d) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
(a) The force exerted by water on the wall per unit length
2 from left to right, the pressure remains same.
is 1/2 gH 
2
(b) The force exerted by water on the wall is 1/2 gH 
(c) The point of application of the resultant force acts
2H/3 below the free surface.
(d) The point of application of the resultant force acts H/3
below the free surface.
FLUID MECHANICS 67
59. A circular cylinder of radius r and height H is filled with 64. The figure shows a siphon tube removing liquid from a
water to a height 2/3 H. It starts rotating about its axis container. Choose the correct statements.
with constantly increasing angular speed. Choose the
correct alternatives.
(a) At all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid. (a) The siphon tube removes liquid only when h1 > 0
(b) The free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and
then the base of the cylinder. (b) The velocity of flow is v  2g  h1  h 2 
(c) The free surface cannot touch the base without spilling
water (c) The pressure at the point B is pB = p0 – gh3
(d) The free surface touches the brim as well as base at (d) The pressure at the point D is p0
the same instant. 65. A tank is filled upto a height h with a liquid and is placed
60. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a variable on a platform of height h from the ground. To get maximum
cross-section. If the pressure of water is P at a point where range xm a small hole is punched at a distance of y from
the velocity of flow is v, what is the pressure at another
the free surface of the liquid. Then
point where the velocity of flow is 2v;  being the density
of water ?
3 2 3 2
(a) P   v (b) P   v
2 2
2 2
(c) P – 2v (d) P + 2v
61. If the velocity head of a stream of water is equal to 10 cm
then its speed of flow is approximately
(a) 1.0 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
(c) 140 m/s (d) 10 m/s (a) xm = 2 h (b) xm = 1.5 h
62. A tank is filled to a height H. The range of water coming (c) y = h (d) y = 0.75 h
out of a hole which is a depth H/4 from the surface of 66. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid up to a height H.
water level is A small hole is made in the vessel at a distance y below,
2H 3H the liquid surface as shown in figure. The liquid emerging
(a) (b) from the hole strike the ground at distance x
3 2
3H
(c) 3H (d)
4
63. A cylindrical vessel of 90 cm height is kept filled up to the
brim. It has four holes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are, respectively,
at height of 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm from the
horizontal floor PQ. The water falling at the maximum
horizontal distance from the vessel comes from
(a) x is equal if hole is at depth y or H – y
H
(b) x is maximum for y 
2
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(a) hole number 4 (b) hole number 3 (d) Both (c) and (d) are wrong
(c) hole number 2 (d) hole number 1
FLUID MECHANICS 68
Numberic Value Type Questions

67. A tube with both ends open floats vertically in water. Oil ASSERTION & REASON
3
with a density 800 kg/m is poured into the tube. The tube (A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
is filled with oil upto the top end while in equilibrium. a correct explanation for Statemetn I.
The length of the tube outside the water is 10 cm.
Determine the depth (in cm) upto which the oil will be (B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
filled in tube. NOT the correct explanation for Statement I.
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
70. Statement I : Pascal’s law is the working principal of a
hydraulic lift.
Statement II : Pressure is equal to thrust acting per unit
area.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
71. Statement I : To float, a body must displace liquid whose
weight is greater than the actual weight of the body.
68. A rectangular metal plate has dimensions of 10 cm × 20cm. Statement II : The body will experience no net downward
A thin film of oil separates the plate from a fixed horizontal force, in the case of floating.
surface. The separation between the rectangular plate and
the horizontal surface is 0.2 mm. An ideal string is attached (a) A (b) B
to the plate and passes over an ideal pulley to a mass m. (c) C (d) D
When m = 125 g, the metal plate moves at constant speed
72. Statement I : A block is immersed in a liquid inside a
of 5 cm/s across the horizontal surface. Find the coefficient
–1 2 2 beaker, which is falling freely. Buoyant force acting on
of viscosity of oil in 10 dyne-s/cm . [g = 10 m/s ]
block is zero.
Statement II : In case of freely falling liquid there is no
pressure difference between any two points.
69. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solution s

(a) A (b) B
of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap
–2
solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air (c) C (d) D
bubble of the same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0
cm inside a container containing soap solution (relative
density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the bubble
–2 5
(in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa)
FLUID MECHANICS 69
73. Statement I : When a body floats such that its parts are Match the Column
immersed into two immiscible liquids then force exerted 75. Match the column I and column II -
by liquid I is of magnitude 1v1g.
Column-I Column-II
Statement II : Total buoyant force = 1v1g + 2v2g.
(A) If the radius of soap bubble A is (P) 16 : 9
fource times that of another soap
bubble B, then the ratio of excess
pressuren (PB/PA) will be
1/3
(B) If two small drops of mercury, each (Q) 2 : 1
of radius R coalesce to form a single
large drop, the ratio of the total surface
energy before and after change will be
(C) The enrgy required to blow a bubble (R) 4 : 1
of radius 4 cm and 3cm in the same
liquid is in the ratio of
(D) Two soap bubbles are blown. In the (S) 1 : 4
(a) A (b) B
first bubble excess pressure in 4 times
(c) C (d) D
that of the second soap bubble. The
74. Statement I : All the raindrops hit the surface of the earth
with the same constant velocity. ratio of radii of first to second soap
Statement II : An object falling through a viscous medium bubble.

eventually attains a terminal velocity.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
FLUIDS MECHANICS 70
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the 3. A uniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 g/cm2 floats in
bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the equilibrium in a combination of two non-mixing liquids A
remaining cylinder is V and mass M. It is suspended by a and B with its axis vertical. The densities of the liquids A
string in a liquid of density , where it stays vertical. The and B are 0.7 g/cm3 and 1.2 g/cm3 respectively. The height
upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the of liquid A is hA = 1.2 cm. The length of the part of the
liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by cylinder immersed in liquid B is hB = 0.8 cm. (2002)
the liquid is (2001)
(a) Find the total force exerted by liquid A on the cylinder.

(a) Mg (b) Mg – Vg
2 2 (b) Find h, the length of the part of the cylinder in air.
(c) Mg + R hg (d) g (V + R h)
2. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in (c) The cylinder is depressed in such a way that its top
water as shown in figure. The distance l and h are shown surface is just below the upper surface of liquid A and
there. After sometime the coin falls into the water. Then is then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder
(2002) immediately after it is released.
4. Statement–I : The stream of water flowing at high speed

from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain
when held vertically up, but tends to narrow down when
held vertically down. (2003)
Statement–II : In any steady flow of an incompressible

fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant.
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

the correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

(a) l decreases and h increases not a correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) l increases and h decreases (c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.

(c) Both l and h increase
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
(d) Both l and h decrease
FLUIDS MECHANICS 71
5. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of 9. Water is filled in a cylindrical container to a height of 3 m.
weight per unit length  is gently placed over the liquid The ratio of the cross-sectional area of the orifice and the
surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the fig. As beaker is 0.1. The square of the speed of the liquid coming
2
a result, the liquid surface is depressed by a distance y (y out from the orifice is (g = 10 m/s ) (2005)
<<a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.
(2004)
2 2 2 2
(a) 50 m /s (b) 50.5m /s
2 2 2 2
(c) 51m /s (d) 52 m /s
Comprehension Type
Passage - 1
6. Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water A wooden cylinder of diameter 4r, height h and density
located at a height of 1.25m above the ground. The diameter /3 is kept on a hole of diameter 2r of a tank, filled with
of the plunger is 8mm and the diameter of the nozzle is liquid of density  as shown in the figure.
2mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25
m/s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the
2
ground. (Take g = 10m/s ). (2004)
10. Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly. When the
level of liquid is at a height h1 above the cylinder the block
starts moving up. At what value of h1, will the block rise ?
(2006)
(a) 4h/9 (b) 5h/9
5h
7. A small sphere falls from rest in a viscous liquid. Due to (c) (d) Remains same
3
friction, heat is produced. Find the relation between the
rate of production of heat and the radius of the sphere at 11. The block in the above question is maintained at the
terminal velocity. (2004) position by external means and the level of liquid is lowered.
8. A U-shaped tube contains a liquid of density  and it is The height h2 when this external force reduces to zero is
rotated about the line as shown in the figure. Find the (2006)
difference in the levels of liquid column. (2005)
4h 5h
(a) (b)
9 9
2h
(c) remains same (d)
3
FLUIDS MECHANICS 72
12. If height h2 of water level is further decreased, then 15. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber
–2
(2006) where the air is maintained at pressure 8 Nm . The radii of
bubbles A and B are 2 cm, respectively. Surface tension of
(a) cylinder will not move up and remains at its original –1
the soap-water used tomake bubbles is 0.04 Nm . Find the
position
nB
(b) for h2 = h/3, cylinder again starts moving up ratio n , where nA and nB are the number of moles of air in
A
(c) for h2=h/4, cylinder again starts moving up
bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of
(d) for h2 = h/5, cylinder again starts moving up gravity] (2009)
13. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap Sol. of 16. A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice (small
radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap Sol. at hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed and water
–2
the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air bubble of the is filled in it upto height H.Now the top is completely sealed
same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0 cm inside a with a cap and the orifice at the bottom is opened. Some
container containing soap Sol. (relative density 1.20), what water comes out from the orifice and the water level in the
–2
would be the pressure inside the bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 vessel becomes steady with height of water column being
5
atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa) (2007) 200 mm. Find the fall in height (in mm) of water level due to
opening of the orifice.
14. A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has a value
5 –2
separating the two identical ends. Initially, the valve is in a [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 10 Nm , density of
–3 –2
tightly closed position. End 1 has a hemispherical soap water = 1000 kg m and g = 10 ms . Neglect any effect of
bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-hemispherical soap surface tension.] (2009)
bubble as shown in figure. Passage - 2
Just after opening the valve. (2008) When liquid medicine of density  is to be put in the eye,
it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on the top
of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of
the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop.
We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is
spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net
vertical force due to the surface tension T when the radius
of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the
weight of the drop, the drop gets detached from the dropper.
(2010)
(a) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. No change in the
17. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical
volume of the soap bubbles
force due to the surface tension on the drop of radius R
(b) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the soap (assuming r << R) is
bubble at end 1 decreases. (a) 2rT (b) 2 RT
(c) no change occurs
2r 2 T 2R 2 T
(d) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the soap (c) (d)
R r
bubble at end 1 increases.
–4 3 –3 –2 –1
18. If r = 5 × 10 m,  = 10 kg m , g = 10 ms , T = 0.11 Nm , the
radius of the drop when it detaches from the dropper is
approximately
–3 –3
(a) 1.4 × 10 m (b) 3.3 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 2.0 × 10 m (d) 4.1 × 10 m
FLUIDS MECHANICS 73
19. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is Passage - 3

–6 –6
(a) 1.4 × 10 J (b) 2.7 × 10 J A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston pushes
–6 –9
(c) 5.4 × 10 J (d) 8.1 × 10 J air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross section is
20. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a truncated cone connected to the nozzle. The other end of the tube is in a
with an apex angle  so that its two ends have cross small liquid container. As the piston pushes air through
sections of different radii. When dipped in water vertically, the nozzle, the liquid from the container rises into the nozzle
water rises in it to a height h, where the radius of its crosss and is sprayed out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of
section is b. If the surface tension of water is S, its density the piston and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
is , and its contact angle with glass is , the value of h will The upper end of the container is open to the atmosphere.
be (g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2014) (2014)
22. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5mms–1, the air comes

out of the nozzle with a speed of
(A) 0.1 ms–1 (B) 1 ms–1
2S 2S
(A) cos      (B) cos      (C) 2ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
b g b g
23. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid l then for a
2S 2S given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) at which
(C) bg cos    /2  (D) cos    /2  the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to
bg
21. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which has a small
a l
hole at the lower end of its side. When the lift is at rest, the (A) (B) a l (C)
l a
water jet coming out of the hole hits the floor of the lift at a
distance d of 1.2 m from the person. In the following, state (D) l
of the lift’s motion is given in List I and the distance where
the water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List II. 24. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid of constant
Match the statements from List I with those in List II and density and is in equilibrium under its own gravity. If P(r)
select the correct answer using the code given below the is the pressure at r(r < P), then the correct option(s) is
lists. (2014) (are). (2015)
List List II
P  r  3R / 4  63
P. Lift is accelerating vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m
(a) P(r = 0) = 0 (b) P r  2R / 4  80
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically down 2. d > 1.2 m
 
with an acceleration less than the
P  r  3R / 5 16 P  r  R / 2  20
gravitational acceleration.
(c) P r  2R / 5  21 (d) P r  R / 3  27
R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
   
constant speed
S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water leaks
out of the jar
(a) P -2, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(c) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
FLUIDS MECHANICS 74
25. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities  and 28. A cylindrical capillary tube of 0.2 mm radius is made by
, respectively. The spheres are connected by a massless joining two capillaries T1 and T2 of different materials
string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  &  having water contact angles of 0° and 60° respectively.
and viscosities  and , respectively. They float in The capillary tube is dipped vertically in water in two
equilibrium with the sphere P in L1 and sphere Q in L2 and different configurations, case I and II as shown in figure.
the string being taut (see figure). If sphere P alone in L2 Which of the following option(s) is (are) correct?
 [Surface tension of water = 0.075 N/m , density of water
has terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal
= 1000 kg/m3, take g = 10m/s2] (2019)

velocity VQ , then (2015)
(a) For case I, if the joint is kept at 8 cm above the water

  surface, the height of water column in the tube will
VP  VP 
  1
(a) V   2
(b) V be 7.5 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the
Q
2 Q
1
meniscus)
    (b) For case I, capillary joint is 5cm above the water
(c) VP .VQ  0 (d) VP .VQ  0
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
26. Consider two solid spheres P and Q each of density 8gm will be more than 8.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the
cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5cm, respectively. Sphere P water in the meniscus)
is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8gm cm–3 and viscosity (c) The correction in the height of water column raised
 = 3 Poiseuille. Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of in the tube, due to weight of water contained in the
density 1.6gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 Poiseuille. The meniscus, will be different for both cases.
ratio of the terminal velocities of P and Q is
(2016) (d) For case II, the capillary joint is 5 cm above the water
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
27. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped
will be 3.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in
vertically into a beaker filled with water. The water rises to
the meniscus)
a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface in
the beaker. The surface tension of water is  . The angle
of contact between water and the wall of the capillary
tube is . Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which
of the following statements is (are) true? (2018)
(a) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases
with increase in r
(b) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is
independent of 
(c) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a
constant acceleration, then h decreases
(d) h is proportional to contact angle 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 75
29. A beaker of radius r is filled with water (refractive index 30. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length 1m rotates with
4 a constant angular velocity 10 3 rad/s about a stationary

= ) up to a height H as shown in the figure on the left.
3 vertical axis O1O2 passing through the end A. The tube is
The beaker is kept on a horizontal table rotating with filled with an ideal fluid. The end A is open and end B has
angular speed  . This makes the water surface curved a very small hole. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s)
so that the difference in the height of water level at from hole when the length of the liquid column is half the
length of tube.
the center and at the circumference of the beaker is(h
<< H, h << r), as shown in the figure on the right. Take
this surface to be approximately spherical with a radius of
curvature s. Which of the following is/are correct? (g is
the acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
31. A train with cross-sectional area St is moving with speed
 t inside a long tunnel of cross-sectional area
S0 (S0 = 4St ) . Assume that almost all the air (density  )

in front of the train flows back between its sides and the
walls of the tunnel. Also, the air flow with respect to the
train is steady and laminar. Take the ambient pressure and
that inside the train to be p0 .If the pressure in the region
h2 + r2
(a) R = between the sides of the train and the tunnel walls is p,
2h
7
then p 0 - p = Vt2 . The value of N is ________.
3r2 2N
(b) R =
2h (2020)
(c) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close 32. A hot air balloon is carrying some passengers, and a few
-1
sandbags of mass 1 kg each so that its total mass is 480
3H  2 H  kg. Its effective volume giving the balloon its buoyancy
to 1+ 
2  2g  is V. The balloon is floating at an equilibrium height of
100 m. When N number of sandbags are thrown out, the
(d) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close to balloon rises to a new equilibrium height close to 150 m
with its volume V remaining unchanged. If the variation
-1
3H  2 H  of the density of air with height h from the ground is
1+ 
4  4g  h
-
(h) = 0 e h0 , where 0 = 1.25 kg m-3 and h 0 = 6000
m, the value of N is _________. (2020)

FLUIDS MECHANICS 76
33. A cylindrical tube, with its base as shown in the figure, is 34. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
filled with water. It is moving down with a constant carries an inverted glass test tube with some air (ideal gas)
acceleration a along a fixed inclined plane with angle trapped as shown in figure. The test tube has a mass of
  45 . P1 and P2 are pressures at point 1 and 2, 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure
respectively, located at the base of the tube. Let
p 0  105 Pa so that the volume of the trapped air
   P1  P2  /  gd  . where  is density of water, d is the
inner diameter of the tube and g is the acceleration due to  0  3.3cc. When the bottle is squeezed from outside at
gravity. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct? constant temperature, the pressure inside rises and the
(2021) volume of the trapped air reduces. It is found that the test
tube begins to sink at pressure p0  p without changing
its orientation. At this pressure, the volume of the trapped
air is  0   let   Xcc and p  Y  103 Pa.
(2021)
(a)   0 when a  g / 2
(b)   0 when a  g / 2
The value of X is _______.
2 1
(c)   when   g / 2 35. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
2
carries an inverted glass test-tube with some air (ideal gas)
1 trapped as shown in the figure. The test-tube has a mass
(d)   when   g / 2
2 of 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure so
that the volume of the trapped air is 0  3.3cc. When the
bottle is squeezed from outside at constant temperature,
the pressure inside rises and the volume of the trapped air
reduces. it is found that the test tube begins to sink at
pressure 0  p without changing the orientation. At this
pressure, the volume of the trapped air is 0   let
3
  Xcc and p  Y  10 Pa .
The value of Y is ______. (2021)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 77
36. A bubble has surface tension S. The ideal gas inside the
5
bubble has ratio of specific heats   . The bubble is
3
exposed to the atmosphere, and it always retains its
spherical shape. When the atmospheric pressure is Pa1 ,
the radius of the bubble is found to be r 1and the
temperature of the enclosed gas is T1 . When the
(2023)
atmospheric pressure is Pa 2 , the radius of the bubble and
Passage - 4
the temperature of the enclosed gas are r2 and T2 A cylindrical furnace has height ( H ) and diameter ( D )
respectively. both 1 m. It is maintained at temperature 360 K. The air
Which of the following statement (s) is (are) gets heated inside the furnace at constant pressure Pa
correct?
and its temperature becomes T  360 K . The hor air with
(2022)
density  rises up a vertical chimney of diameter
(a) If the surface of the bubble is a perfect heat insulator,
d  0.1 m and height h  9 m above the furnace and exists
then
(b) If the surface of the bubble is a perfect heat insulator, the chimney (see the figure). As a result, atmospheric air
then the total internal energy of the bubble including its of density  a  1.2 kgm 3 , pressure Pa and temperature
surface energy does not change with the external Ta  300 K enters the furnace. Assume air as an ideal
atmospheric pressure. gas, neglect the variations in and inside the chimney and
(c) If the surface of the bubble is a perfect heat conductor the furnace. Also ignore the viscous effects.
and the change in atmospheric temperature is negligible,
[Given: The acceleration due to gravity g  10 ms 2
then
and   3.14 ]
(d) If the surface of the bubble is a perfect heat insulator,
3
4S
Pa 2 
 T2 2 r2
   4S
then  T1 
Pa1 
r1
37. An incompressible liquid is kept in a container having a
weightless piston with a hole. A capillary tube of inner
radius 0.1 mm is dipped vertically into the liquid through
the airtight piston hole, as shown in the figure. The air in
the container is isothermally compressed from its original
100 38. Considering the air flow to be streamline, the steady mass
volume V0 to V0 with the movable piston. Considering
101
flow rate of air exiting the chimney is ______ gm s 1 .
air as in ideal gas, the height ( h ) of the liquid column in
(2023)
the capillary above the liquid level in cm is ______.
39. When the chimney is closed using a cap at the top, a
[Given: Surface tension of the liquid is 0.075 Nm 1 , pressure difference P develops between the top and
5 2
atmospheric is 10 Nm , acceleration due to gravity the bottom surfaces of the cap. If the changes in the
( g ) is 10 ms 2 , density of the liquid is 103 kgm 3 and temperature and density of the hot air, due to the stoppage
of air flow, are negligible then the value of is ______ .
contact angle of capillary surface with the liquid is zero]
(2023)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 78
FLUIDS MECHANICS

12
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION 80
1. INTRODUCTION 2 m m
Time period (T) =  2 as  
 k k
(1) A motion which repeats itself over and over again 3. Frequency
after a regular interval of time is called a periodic The frequency of a particle executing S.H.M. is
motion. equal to the number of oscillations completed in
(2) Oscillatory or vibratory motion is kind of motion one second.
in which a body moves to and fro or back and forth  1 k
 
repeatedly about a fixed point in a definite interval 2 2 m
of time. 4. Phase
(3) Simple harmonic motion is a specific type of The phase of particle executing S.H.M. at any
instant is its state as regard to its position and
oscillatory motion, in which
direction of motion at that instant. It is measured as
(a) particle moves in one dimension, argument (angle) of sine in the equation of S.H.M.
(b) particle moves to and fro about a fixed mean Phase = (t + )
position (where Fnet = 0), At t = 0, phase = ; the constant  is called initial
(c) net force on the particle is always directed phase of the particle or phase constant.
towards mean position, and 1.2 Important Relations
(d) magnitude of net force is always proportional
1. Position (For   2n )
to the displacement of particle from the mean
position at that instant.
So, Fnet  x  Fnet   kx
where, k is known as force constant
 ma = – kx
k
 a x or a   2 x
m
Fig. 12.1
where,  is known as angular frequency.
If mean position is at origin the position
d2x
 2   2 x (x coordinate) depends on time in general as:
dt x (t) = sin (t + )
This equation is called as the differential  At mean position, x = 0
equation of S.H.M.  At extremes, x = + A, – A
The general expression for x(t) satisfying the 2. Velocity (For   2n )
above equation is: x (t) = A sin (t + )
1.1 Some Important terms
1. Amplitude
The amplitude of particle executing S.H.M. is its
maximum displacement on either side from the
mean position.
A is the amplitude of the particle in the equation Fig. 12.2
x(t) = A sin (t + )
 At any instant t, v(t )  A cos( t   )
2. Time Period
Time period of a particle executing S.H.M. is the  At any position x, v( x)   A2  x 2
time taken to complete one cycle and is denoted by  Velocity is minimum at extremes because the
T. particles is at rest.
i.e., v = 0 at extreme position.
SCAN CODE
 Velocity has maximum magnitude at mean 1 2 1

position. U  x  kx  mA2 2 sin 2  t   
2 2
vmax   A at mean position.
3. Acceleration (For   2n )
Fig. 12.5
1 2
 U is maximum at extremes, Umax = kA
2
Fig. 12.3  U is minimum at mean position
 At any instant t, a(t )   2 A sin(t   ) 2.3 Total Energy
 At any position x, a( x)   2 x
 Acceleration is always directed towards mean
position.
 The magnitude of acceleration is minimum at
mean position and maximum at extremes.
Fig. 12.6
amin  0 at mean position.
amax   2 A at extremes. 1 2 1
T .E .  kA  mA2 2
2 2
2. ENERGY IN SHM NOTE:

Total energy is constant at all instants and at all
2.1 Kinetic Energy positions
1 2
K mv
2
1
 K  m 2  A2  x 2  (as v   A2  x 2 )
2
1
 m 2 A2 cos 2 t   
2
Fig. 12.7 Energy Position Graph
3. RELATION BETWEEN SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION AND UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Fig. 12.4
 K is maximum at mean position and minimum at
extremes.
1 1
 K max  m  2 A2  kA2 at mean position
2 2
 Kmin = 0 at extremes.
2.2 Potential Energy
Fig. 12.8
If potential energy is taken as zero at mean position, Consider a particle Q, moving on a circle of radius A
then at any position x,
with constant angular  .
SCAN CODE
The projection of Q on a diameter BC is P. It is clear (b) Displace the particle by a displacement ‘x’ from the
from the figure that as Q moves around the circle the mean position in the probable direction of
projection P oscillates between B and C. oscillation.
The angle that the radius OQ makes with the x-axis is (c) Find the net force on it and check if it is towards
   t   . Here,  is the angle made by the radius mean position.
OQ with the x-axis at time t = 0. Further, (d) Try to express net force as a proportional function
OP  OQ cos  of its displacement ‘x’.
or x  A cos  t    NOTE:
This is standard x-t equation of SHM. If step (c) and step (d) are proved then it is a simple
Hence, P executives SHM. That is harmonic motion.
(e) Find k from expression of net force (F = – kx) and

m
find time period using T  2 .
k
Fig. 12.9 5. SPRING BLOCK SYSTEM

Fig. (a) Relation between SHM and uniform circular
motion, 8 5.1 Horizontal Spring
(b) Position, Let a block of mass m be placed on a smooth horizontal
(c) Velocity and surface and rigidly connected to spring of force constant
(d) acceleration K whose other end is permanently fixed.
When a particle moves with uniform circular motion, its
projection on a diameter moves with SHM. The velocity
of Q is perpendicular to OQ and has a magnitude of
velocity v   A .
The component v ' along the x-axis is,
v   v  sin  or v   A sin  t   
Which is also the velocity of P. The acceleration of Q is
centripetal and has a magnitude, a    2 x . Fig. 12.10
The component of a  along the x-axis is  Mean position: when spring is at its natural length.
a   a  cos  or a   2 A cos  t    m
 Time period: T  2
Which again coincides with the acceleration of P. k
5.2 Vertical Spring
NOTE:
v  velocity of SHM of particle (a) If the spring is suspended vertically from a fixed
dx d point and carries the block at its other end as
   A cos  t       A sin  t    shown, the block will oscillate along the vertical
dt dt 
a  acceleration of SHM of particle line.
dv
   2 A cos  t   
dt
4. TIME PERIOD OF S.H.M.
To find whether a motion is S.H.M. or not and to find

its time period, follow these steps: Fig. 12.11
(a) Locate the mean (equilibrium) position mg
 Mean position: spring in elongated by d 
mathematically by balancing all the forces on it. k
SCAN CODE
m
k
Example: A light spring of force constant k is held
5.3 Combination of Springs between two blocks of masses m and 2m. The two
blocks and the spring system rests on a smooth
(a) Springs in Series horizontal floor. Now the blocks are moved towards
When two springs of force constant k1 and k2 are each other compressing the spring by x and then they
connected in series as shown, they are equivalent to are suddenly released. Then find the relative velocity
a single spring of force constant k which is given between the blocks when the spring attains its natural
by length.
1 1 1
 
k k1 k2
k1k2
k Fig. 12.15
k1  k2
Solution: Potential energy of the spring is being
converted into kinetic energy of system.
1 2
Potential energy of the spring before released  kx
2
K.E. of the system in centre of mass frame
1 2 m  2m 2m
  vrelative where    is reduced
2 m  2m 3
mass of the system.
1 2 1
Now,  vrelative  kx 2
2 2
2 3 2
vrelative  kx
Fig. 12.12 2m
(b) Springs in parallel  3k 
vrelative    x
For a parallel combination as shown, the effective  2m 
spring constant is k = k1 + k2 6. ANGULAR SHM
6.1 Angular Oscillations
Instead of straight-line motion, if a particle or centre of
mass of a body is oscillating on a small arc of circular
path then it is called angular S.H.M.
For angular S.H.M.,  = – k

 I  kθ
Fig. 12.13
I
5.4 Reduced Mass and Problems Involving  Time period, T  2
k
Reduced Mass
6.1.1 Simple Pendulum
Definition: When two bodies in relative motion are
acted upon by a central force involving Newton’s law 
then the system can be replaced by a single mass g
called the reduced mass which is given as
 Time period of a pendulum in a lift:
mm
 1 2 
m1  m2 T  2
ga
(if acceleration a of the lift is upwards)

T  2
ga
Fig. 12.14 (if acceleration a of the lift is downwards)
SCAN CODE
6.1.2 Physical Pendulum This system is called a torsional pendulum. There is no

I small-angle restriction in this situation as long as the
Time period: T  2 elastic limit of the wire is not exceeded. Figure shows
mgl
the balance wheel of a watch oscillating as a torsional
pendulum, energized by the mainspring.
7. SUPERPOSITION OF SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION
A simple harmonic motion is produced when a force

(called restoring force) proportional to the
displacement acts on a particle. If a particle is acted
upon by two such forces the resultant motion of the
Fig. 12.16 particle is a combination of two simple harmonic
motions.
Where, I is moment of inertia of object about point of
suspension, and l is distance of centre of mass of Suppose the two individual motions are represented
object from point of suspension. by,
6.1.3 Torsional pendulum x1  A1 sin t

And x2  A2 sin  t   
Both the simple harmonic motions have same angular
frequency  .
Fig. 12.17 Fig. 12.18

Figure shows a rigid body suspended by a wire attached
The resultant displacement of the particle is given by,
at the top to a fixed support. When the body is twisted
x  x1  x2
through some small angle  , the twisted wire exerts on
 A1 sin  t  A2 sin  t   
the body a restoring torque that proportional to the
 A sin  t   
angular displacement. That is,   
Where  (kappa) is called the torsion constant of the Here, A  A12  A22  2 A1 A2 cos 
support wire. The value of  can be obtained by A2 sin 
applying a known torque to twist the wire through a And tan  
A1  A2 cos 
measurable angle  . Applying Newton’s second law
Thus, we can see that this is similar to the vector
for rotational motion, we find addition. The same method of vector addition can be
d 2 applied to the combination of more than two simple
    I harmonic motions.
dt 2
d 2  8. DAMPED AND FORCED OSCILLATIONS
2
 
dt I
Again, this is the equation of motion for a simple 8.1 Damped Oscillations
 (i) The oscillations of a body whose amplitude goes
harmonic oscillator, with   and time period
I on decreasing with time is defined as damped
oscillations.
I
T  2

SCAN CODE
(ii) In these oscillations the amplitude of oscillation 9.1 Oscillation of a Cylinder Floating in a Liquid
decreases exponentially due to damping forces Let a cylinder of mass m and density d be floating on
like frictional force, viscous force etc. the surface of a liquid of density  . The total length of
cylinder is L.
Fig. 12.19
(iii) Due to decrease in amplitude the energy of the
oscillator also goes on decreasing exponentially.
8.2 Forced Oscillation Fig. 12.20
The oscillations in which a body oscillates under the
Ld
influence of an external periodic force are known as  Mean position: cylinder is immersed upto   .
forced oscillations. 
8.3 Resonance Ld 
 Time period: T  2  2 .
g g
When the frequency of external force is equal to the
natural frequency of the oscillator, then this state is 9.2 Liquid Oscillating in a U-tube
known as the state of resonance. And this frequency is
known as resonant frequency. Consider a liquid column of mass m and density  in a
8.4 Resonance and its Consequences U-tube of area of cross section A. Let L = 2H,
The fact that there is an amplitude peak at driving
frequencies close to the natural frequency of the
system is called resonance. Physics is full of examples
of resonance; building up the oscillations of a child on
a swing by pushing with a frequency equal to the h
swing’s natural frequency is one. Inexpensive loud
speakers often have an unwanted boom or buzz when
a musical note happens to coincide with the resonant
frequency of the speaker cone. Resonance also occurs
in electric circuits; a tuned circuit in a radio or
television receiver responds strongly to waves having Fig. 12.21
frequencies near its resonant frequency, and this fact is  Mean position: when height of liquid is same in
used to select a particular station and reject the others.
both limbs.
Resonance in mechanical systems can be destructive.  Time period:
A company of soldiers once destroyed a bridge by
marching across it in step; the frequency of their steps m 2L  A L
T  2  2  2
was close to the natural vibration frequency of the 2 A g 2 A g 2g
bridge and the resulting oscillation had large enough where, L is length of liquid column.
amplitude to tear the bridge apart.
Ever since, marching soldiers have been ordered to
break step before crossing a bridge. Nearly everyone
has seen the film of the collapse of the Tacoma
Narrows suspension bridge in 1940.
SCAN CODE
9. MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF SHM The pulley is moveable and string inextensible, so if

mass m moves down a distance y, the pulley will move
 y
9.3 Body Oscillation in Tunnel Along Any Chord of down by   .
2
the Earth
ky
So the force in the spring F  .
2
Now as pulley is massless F  2T ,
F ky
T   .
2 4
So the restoring force on the mass m,
Fig. 12.22 1 1
T  ky  k ' y  k '  k
 Mean position: At the centre of the chord. 4 4
 Time period: 1 k' 1 k f
 fB    A
R 2 m 2 4m 2
T  2  84.6 minutes
g
where, R is radius of earth = 6400 Km.
9.4 Pulley Spring Block System
A system is consisting of massless pulley, a spring of
spring constant k and a block of mass m. If the block is
slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium
position and released.
Let’s find the frequency of its vertical oscillation in
given cases:
Case (A):
As the pulley is fixed and string in inextensible, if mass
m is displaced by y the spring will stretch by y Fig. 12.24
F = T = ky i.e., Case (C):
restoring force is linear and so motion of mass m will be In this situation if the mass m moved by the pulley will
linear simple harmonic with frequency also move by y and so the spring will stretch by 2 (as
1 k string is inextensible) and so, T '  F  2ky .
fA 
2 m Now as pulley is massless so T  F  T '  4ky
i.e., the restoring force on the mass m
So, T  4ky  k ' y  k '  4k
1 k' 1 4k
 fC    2 fA
2 m 2 m
Fig. 12.23
Case (B):
Fig. 12.25
SCAN CODE
EXERCISE – 1: BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Periodic Motion and Oscillatory Motion Simple Harmonic Motion
1. Which of the following equations does not represent a 6. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
simple harmonic motion? amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through
–3
(a) y = a sin  t (b) y = b cos  t the mean position, its K.E. is 8 × 10 J. The equation
(c) y = a sin  t + b cos  t (d) y = a tan  t of motion of the particle, when the initial phase of
o
2. A body is moving in a room with a velocity of 20 m/s oscillation is 45 , is
perpendicular to the two walls separated by 5 m.    
(a) y  0.1sin  3t   (b) y  0.1cos  3t  
There is no friction and the collisions with the walls  4  4
are elastic. The motion of the body is
   
(a) not periodic (c) y  0.1sin  4t   (d) y  0.1cos  4t  
 4   4
(b) periodic but not simple harmonic
7. The displacement of a particle is represented by the
(c) periodic and simple harmonic
(d) periodic with variable time period  
equation: y = 3 cos   2t 
3. Assertion: In extreme position of a particle executing  4 
S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are zero. The motion of the particle is:
Reason: In S.H.M., acceleration always acts towards 2
mean position. (a) simple harmonic with period

(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is

the correct explanation of Assertion. (b) simple harmonic with period
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is 
NOT the correct explanation of Assertion. (c) periodic but not simple harmonic
(c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. (d) non-periodic
(d) Assertion is false but Reason is true. 8. For the two curves choose the correct option.
4. The function sin 2  t represents

(a) a periodic but simple harmonic motion with a
period 2 / 
(b) a periodic but not simple harmonic motion with a
period  / 
(c) a simple harmonic motion with a period 2 /  (a) (Amplitude)A > (Amplitude)B
(d) a simple harmonic motion with a period  /  (b) (Time period)A > (Time period)B
5. Out of the following functions representing motion of (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
a particle which represents SHM? (d) Both (a) and (b) are incorrect
(1) y = sin ωt – cos ωt (2) y = sin3ωt 9. The relation between acceleration and displacement
 3  of four particles are given below:
(3) y  5cos   3t  (4) y  1   t   2 t 2
 4  which one of the particles is executing simple
(a) Only (1) and (2) harmonic motion?
2
(b) Only (1) (a) ax = + 2x (b) ax = + 2x
2
(c) Only (4) does not represent SHM (c) ax = – 2x (d) ax = – 2x
(d) Only (1) and (3) 10. A particle executing SHM has a maximum speed of
2
30 cm/s and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s . The
period of oscillation is:

(a)  s (b) s
2

(c) 2 s (d) s
4
11. For a particle in SHM, if the amplitude of the 17. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between
displacement is a and the amplitude of velocity is v x = –A and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from
the amplitude of acceleration is: 0 to A/2 is t1 and to go from A/2 to A is t2. Then
v2 (a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2
(a) va (b)
a (c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 = 2 t2
2
v v 18. Two pendulums of time period 3 s and 8 s
(c) (d)
2a a respectively starts oscillating simultaneously from
12. What is the ratio of maximum acceleration to the two opposite extreme positions. After how much time
maximum velocity of a simple harmonic oscillator? they will be in the same phase?
2 24 12
(a)  (b) (a) s (b) s
 5 5
1 24 12
(c) (d) 2 (c) s (d) s
 11 11
19. Two particles are executing simple harmonic motion
13. A mass m is performing linear simple harmonic
of the same amplitude A and frequency  along the
motion, then which of the following graph represents
x–axis. Their mean position is separated by distance
correctly the variation of acceleration a corresponding
x0 (x0 > A). If the maximum separation between them
to linear velocity v?
is (x0 + A), the phase difference between their motion
v2 v2 is
 
(a) (b)
(a) (b) 3 4
 
a2 a2 (c) (d)
6 2
v2 v2 20. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, initial
position and sense of revolution are indicated in the
fig.
(c) (d)
a2 a2
14. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies with
time (in seconds) according to the equation
  t 1
y = sin    , where y is in cm. The maximum
2  2 3
acceleration (in m/s) of the particle is:
[take  2  10] y – projection of the radius vector of rotating particle
Phasors in SHM P is:
15. The phase difference between x1  A sin  t and  t 

(a) y(t) = 4 sin   , where y in m
x 2  A cos  t is: 2
   3t 
(a) (b) (b) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
2 4  2 
 
(c) (d)  t 
3 6 (c) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
2
16. The time taken by a particle executing S.H.M. of
period T to move from the mean position to half the (d) y(t) = – 3 cos 2πt, where y in m
maximum displacement is
(a) T/2 (b) T/4
(c) T/8 (d) T/12
21. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with 26. The kinetic energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is
frequency 5. The frequency at which its kinetic 16 J when it is in its mean position. If the amplitude
energy changes into potential energy is of oscillations is 25 cm and the mass of the particle is
5.12 kg, the time period of its oscillation in seconds is
(a) /5 (b) 2 
Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
(c) 5  (d) 20 
22. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, the 27. The force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m.
displacement x is given by x = A sin t. Identify the A body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled
graph, which represents the variation of potential down through 5 cm from it’s mean position and then
energy (PE) as a function of time t and displacement released. The maximum kinetic energy of the system
x (spring + body) will be
–2 –2
(a) 2 × 10 J (b) 4 × 10 J
–2 –2
(c) 8 × 10 J (d) 16 × 10 J
28. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillation of
mass 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its total
energy is 9 J and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time

period of oscillation is s , find the value of n
n
Spring Block System
29. A mass of 1 kg attached to the bottom of a spring has
a certain frequency of vibration. The following mass
(a) I, III (b) II, III has to be added to it in order to reduce the frequency
(c) I, IV (d) II, IV by half.
23. If a conservative force is acting on a system in SHM. (a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg
The total mechanical energy is: (c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg
(a) time dependent 30. The period of oscillation of a mass m suspended from
(b) position dependent a spring is 2 seconds. If along with it another mass of
(c) amplitude dependent 2 kg is also suspended, the period of oscillation
(d) both (a) and (c) are correct increases by one second. The mass m will be
24. The expression for displacement of an object in SHM (a) 2 kg (b) 1 kg
T (c) 1.6 kg (d) 2.6 kg
is x = A cos (t). The potential energy at t  is
2 31. In the figure shown below, the block is moved
(take potential energy at mean position to be zero): sideways by a distance A. The magnitude of net force
1 2 1 2 on the block is:
(a) kA (b) kA
2 8
1 2
(c) kA (d) zero
4
25. A body executes simple harmonic motion. The
potential energy (PE), the kinetic energy (KE) and
total energy (TE) are measured as function of
displacement x. Which of the following statements is (a) (k1 – k2) A (b) (k2 – k1) A
true? (c) (k1 + k2) A (d) None of the above
(a) KE is maximum when x = 0
(b) TE is zero when x = 0
(c) KE is maximum when x is maximum
(d) PE is maximum when x = 0
32. The time period of a spring mass system shown 35. A block of mass 1 kg hangs without vibrating at the
below is equal to: end of a spring whose force constant is 200 N/m and
which is attached to the ceiling of an elevator. The
elevator is rising with an upward acceleration of g/3
when the acceleration suddenly ceases. The angular
frequency of the block after the acceleration ceases is
(c) 15 rad/s (d) None of these
2m m
(a) 2 (b) 2 A
k 4k 36. A block is left from x = + A, its speed at x  is:
2
2
2 m ( = 2 rad/s).
k
33. There are two springs mass systems as shown in the

figures. Resistive forces are absent everywhere. Let
the time periods of two systems are T1 and T2. The
relation between T1 and T2 is: (a) (3A) m/s (b) ( 3 A ) m/ s
(c) (2A) m/s (d) ( 2 A ) m/ s
37. The displacement of an object attached to a spring
and executing simple harmonic motion is given by
x  2  10 2 cos( t) m. The time at which the
maximum speed first occurs is:
T2 (a) 0.5 s (b) 0.75 s
(a) T1 
2 (c) 0.125 s (d) 0.25 s
T 38. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1m.
(b) T2  1
T2 The mass that must be suspended from the spring so
(c) T1 = T2 that it oscillates with a period of (/4) second is
(d) Cannot establish the relation between them (a) (/4) kg (b) 1 kg
34. Two identical springs are connected in series and (c) () kg (d) 10 kg
parallel as shown in the figure. If fs and fp are 39. If a spring has time period T, and is cut into n equal
frequencies of series and parallel arrangements, what parts, then the time period of each part will be
f T
is s ? (a) T n (b)
fp n
(c) nT (d) T
40. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
from two separate massless springs of spring constant
k1 and k2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
vertically such that their maximum velocities are
equal, the ratio of the amplitude of M to that of N is
k1 k1
(a) (b)
k2 k2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1 k2 k2
(c) (d)
k1 k1
41. A block is in SHM on a frictionless surface as shown 44. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a
in the figure. The position x = 0 shows the vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m
unstretched position of the spring. resting on a smooth horizontal surface. There is
another wall at a distance x 0 from the block. The
spring is then compressed by 2x 0 and released. The
 m
time taken to strike the wall is , find the value
n k
of n
Choose the correct option with reference to the above
system.
(a) +A and –A are maximum displacements where, A
is amplitude
(b) x = 0 indicate the equilibrium position
(c) The block executes to and fro motion about the
mean position, when pulled aside and released Angular SHM
(d) All of the above 45. If we do an experiment by swinging a small ball by a
42. If the block is pulled by a distance x and left, the thread of length 100 cm, what will be the approximate
block will start oscillating. The value of x, so that at a time for complete to and fro periodic motion if the
moment when speed of the block become zero the swinging angle is very small?
spring become unstretched. (a) 4 s (b) 2 s
(c) 6 s (d) 1 s
46. What is the velocity of the bob of a simple pendulum
at its mean position, if it is able to rise to vertical
–2
height of 10 cm? (g = 9.8 ms ).
mg 2k
(a) (b)
2k mg
mg 2mg
(c) (d)
k k
43. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which –1 –1
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular (a) 2.2 ms (b) 1.8 ms
–1 –1
frequency  . The amplitude of oscillation is (c) 1.4 ms (d) 0.6 ms
gradually increased. The coin will leave contact with 47. A man measures time period of a simple pendulum
the platform for the first time inside a stationary lift and find it to be T. If the lift
(a) at the highest position of the platform starts accelerating upwards with an acceleration g/4,
(b) at the mean position of the platform then the time period of pendulum will be
g 2T 5T
(c) at an amplitude of (a) (b)
2 5 2
2
g 5 2
(d) for an amplitude of 2
(c) (d)
 2T 5T
48. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping, as 53. A simple pendulum is made of a body which is a
shown in figure. When the displacement of the bob is hollow sphere containing mercury suspended by
 means of a wire. If a little mercury is drained off, the
less than maximum, its acceleration vector a is
correctly shown in period of pendulum will:
(a) remain unchanged (b) increase
(c) decrease (d) become erratic
Miscellaneous Examples of SHM
(a) (b)
54. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis has a
2
a potential energy U(x) = a + bx where a and b are
positive constants. It will execute simple harmonic
a motion with a frequency determined by the value of
(a) b alone (b) b and a alone
(c) b and m alone (d) b, a and m alone
55. A metre stick swinging in vertical plane about a fixed
(c) (d) horizontal axis passing through its one end undergoes
small oscillation of frequency f0. If the bottom half of
a
a
the stick were cut off, then its new frequency of small
49. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a oscillation would become.
lift. When the lift is at rest its time period is T. With
what acceleration should the lift be accelerated
upwards in order to reduce its period to T/2? (g is
acceleration due to gravity).
(a) 2g (b) 3g
(c) 4g (d) g
50. A hollow sphere is filled with water through the small (a) f0 (b) 2 f0
hole in it. It is then hung by a long thread and made to
oscillate. As the water slowly flow out of the hole at (c) 2f0 (d) 2 2 f 0
the bottom, the period of oscillation will:
(a) continuously decrease 56. Which of the following expressions of force,
(b) continuously increase corresponds to simple harmonic motion along a
(c) first decrease then increase straight line, where x is the displacement and a, b, c
(d) first increase then decrease are positive constant?
51. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the (a) a + bx – cx2 (b) a – bx + cx2
2
Earth’s surface and T2 when taken to a height 2R (c) bx (d) – bx
57. A physical pendulum is positioned so that its centre
above the Earth’s surface, where R is the radius of the
of gravity is above the suspension point. When the
T pendulum is released it passes the point of stable
Earth. The value of 1 is:
T2 equilibrium with an angular velocity . The period of
(a) 1/9 (b) 1/3 small oscillations of the pendulum is
(c) 3 (d) 9 (a) 4 (b) 2
52. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic  

motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and time (c) (d) 
 2
a 58. The displacement of a particle varies with time
period T. The speed of the pendulum at x  is
2 according to the relation: y = asin t + bcos t.
Choose the correct statement.
a n (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM.
, find the value of n (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b).
T 2 2
(c) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b )
a 3 a (d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a2  b2
(a) (b)
2T T 59. The displacement equation of a particle is
2 x = 3 sin 2 t + 4 cos 2 t
3 a a 3
(c) (d) The amplitude and maximum velocity will be
T T respectively
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
(c) 3, 4 (d) 4, 2
Superposition of Simple Harmonic Motion 68. The drag force on the vane is directly proportional to:
60. Four simple harmonic motions. (a) velocity of vane (b) displacement of vane
x1 = 8 sin t; x2 = 6 sin (t + /2); x3 = 4 sin (t + ) (c) spring constant (d) mass of the block
69. The expression for the motion of block in damped
and x4 = 2 sin (t + 3/2) are superimposed on each oscillation can be represented as:
other. The resulting amplitude and its phase
difference with x1 are respectively d2 x dx dx d2x
(a) m b  kx  0 (b) m  b 2  kx  0
–1 dt 2 dt dt dt
(a) 20, tan (1/2) (b) 4 2 , /2
–1 d2 x dx d2 x dx
(c) 20, tan (2) (d) 4 2 , /4 (c) m b  kx  0 (d) m  b  kx  0
dt 2 dt dt 2 dt
61. The resultant of two rectangular simple harmonic 70. In case of a forced vibration, the resonance wave
motions of same frequency and unequal amplitudes becomes very sharp when the
 (a) applied periodic force is small
but differing in phase by is:
2 (b) quality factor is small
(a) Simple harmonic (b) Circular (c) damping force is small
(c) Elliptical (d) Parabolic (d) restoring force is small
71. When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100
62. Two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic
1
vibrations have same amplitude, frequency, and oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to of its initial
phase. When they superimpose, the resultant form of 3
vibrations will be: value. What will be its amplitude when it completes
(a) A circle (b) An ellipse 200 oscillations? [A0: initial amplitude]
1 2
(c) A straight line (d) A parabola (a) A0 (b) A0
63. The composition of two simple harmonic motions of 5 3
equal periods at right angle to each other with a phase 1 1
(c) A0 (d) A0
difference of  results in the displacement of the 6 9
particles along: 72. Match the following columns of damped oscillations
(a) Straight line (b) Circle expressed by x(t)  Ae  bt / 2 m cos (  ' t   ) , where
(c) Ellipse (d) Parabola Column-I Column-II
(A) b = 0 means 1. Small damping
Damped and Forced Oscillations
1 2  bt/ m
64. Pendulum after some time becomes slow in motion (B) kA e equals 2. Amplitude
2
and finally stops due to: b
(a) air friction (b) earth’s gravity (C) If  1 means 3. No damping
(c) mass of pendulum (d) none of the above km
65. In the above question, the net force acting on the 4. Total mechanical
block of mass m is: energy
(a) kx – bv (b) –kx – bv Choose the correct option regarding above columns.
(c) –kx + bv (d) None of these Form the codes given below
(here, x is the displacement of the block and v is the Codes
velocity of the block, k is spring constant and b is A B C
damping constant.) (a) 3 2 1
66. The graph between velocity and position for a (b) 1 2 3
damped oscillation will be: (c) 3 4 1
(a) Straight line (b) Circle (d) 3 4 2
(c) Ellipse (d) Spiral
67. In damped oscillation graph between velocity and
position will be:
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
EXERCISE – 2: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

5. The point A moves with a uniform speed along the
circumference of a circle of radius 0.36 m and covers
30o in 0.1 s. The perpendicular projection ‘P’ from
deleted from JEE Main ‘A’ on the diameter MN represents the simple
1. In the given figure, a body of mass M is held between harmonic motion of ‘P’. The restoration force per unit
two massless springs, on a smooth inclined plane. The mass when P touches M will be: [2021]
free ends of the springs are attached to firm supports.
If each spring has spring constant k, the frequency of
oscillation of given body is: [2021]
(a) 0.49 N/kg (b) 50 N/kg

1 2k 1 k (c) 9.87 N/kg (d) 100 N/kg
(a) (b) 6. If two similar springs each of spring constant k1 are
2 M 2 2M
joined in series, the new spring constant and time
1 2k 1 k
(c) (d) period would be changed by a factor: [2021]
2 Mgsin  2 Mg sin 
1 1
2. If the time period of a two meter long simple (a) , 2 2 (b) , 2
2 4
pendulum is 2s, the acceleration due to gravity at the
place where pendulum is executing S.H.M. is: [2021] 1 1
(c) , 2 2 (d) , 2
(a) 9.8ms 2 (b) 16 ms 2 4 2
7. Given below are two statements:
(c)  2 ms 2 (d) 2 2 ms 2
Statement I: A second’s pendulum has a time period
3. Y  A sin  t  0  is the time-displacement equation of 1 second.
of a SHM. At t = 0 the displacement of the particle is Statement II: It takes precisely one second to move
A between the two extreme positions.
Y  and it is moving along negative x-direction.
2 In the light of the above statements, chose the correct
Then the initial phase angle 0 will be: [2021] answer from the options given below [2021]
 5 (a) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
(a) (b)
6 6 (b) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
 2 (c) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
(c) (d)
3 3 (d) Both Statement I and Statement Ii are false
4. Two identical springs of spring constant ‘2k’ are 8. A particle executes S.H.M., the graph of velocity as a
attached to a block of mass m and to fixed support function of displacement is [2021]
(see figure). When the mass is displaced from (a) A circle (b) An ellipse
equilibrium position on either side, it executes simple (c) A parabola (d) A helix
harmonic motion. The time period of oscillations of
this system is: [2021] 9. Time period of a simple pendulum is T inside a lift
when the lift is stationary. If the lift moves upwards
with an acceleration g/2, the time period of pendulum
will be [2021]
2 3
m m (a) T (b) T
(a) 2 (b) 2 3 2
2k k
T
m m (c) (d) 3T
(c)  (d)  3
k 2k
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 16. Time period of a simple pendulum is T. The time
5
deleted from JEE Main taken to complete
8
oscillations starting from mean
10*. Amplitude of a mass-spring system, which is

executing simple harmonic motion decreases with position is T . The value of α is: [2021]
12
time.
17. Consider two identical springs each of spring constant
If mass = 500g. Decay constant =20 g/s then how
k and negligible mass compared to the mass M as
much time is required for the amplitude of the system
shown. Figure 1 shows one of them and figure 2
to drop to half of its initial value? (ln 2 = 0.693)
shows their series combination. The ratios of time
[2021]
T
(a) 17.32 (b) 34.65 period of oscillation of the two SHM is b  x ,
(c) 0.034 (d) 15.01 Ta
11. For what value of displacement, the kinetic energy where value of x is_________. (Round off to the
and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillation Nearest Integer) [2021]
become equal? [2021]
(a) x  0 (b) x   A
A A
(c) x   (d) x 
2 2
12*. A block of mass 1 kg attached to a spring is made to
oscillate with an initial amplitude of 12 cm.
After 2 minutes the amplitude decreases to 6 cm.
Determine the value of the damping constant for this
18. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with a
motion: (take ln 2 = 0.693) [2021]
period of 2 second. The time taken by the particle to
(a) 0.69  10 2 kg s 1 (b) 3.3  102 kg s 1 cover a displacement equal to half of its amplitude
(c) 1.16 102 kg s 1 (d) 5.7  10 3 kg s 1 1
from the mean position is s.
13. Two particles A and B of equal masses are suspended a
from two massless springs of spring constants K1 and The value of ‘a’ to the nearest integer is ………
K2 respectively. If the maximum velocities during [2021]
oscillations are equal, the ratio of the amplitude of A 19. The motion of a simple pendulum executing S.H.M. is
and B is: [2021]
represented by the following equation.
K2 K1
(a) (b) y  A sin  t    where time is measured in second.
K1 K2
The length of pendulum is (JEE Main 2022)
K1 K2
(c) (d) (a) 97.23 cm (b) 25.3 cm
K2 K1
(c) 99.4 cm (d) 406.1 cm
14. The function of time representing a simple harmonic 20. When a particle executes simple Harmonic motion, the
 nature of graph of velocity as function of displacement
motion with a period of is: [2021]
 will be : (JEE Main 2022)
(a) sin 3 ( t ) (a) Circular (b) Ellipitical
(b) sin(t )  cos (t ) (c) Sinusoidal (d) Straight line
  21. Assume there are two identical simple pendulum
(c) 3 cos   2t  Clocks-1 is placed on the earth and Clock-2 is placed
4 
(d) cos (t )  cos (2t )  cos (3t ) on a space station located at a height h above the earth
15. A particle executes S.H.M. with amplitude ‘A’ and surface. Clock-1 and Clock-2 operate at time periods
4s and 6s respectively. Then the value of h is –
time period ‘T’. The displacement of the particle (consider radius of earth RE = 6400 km and g on earth
xA 10 m/s2) (JEE Main 2022)
when its speed is half of maximum speed is . (a) 1200 km (b) 1600 km
2
(c) 3200 km (d) 4800 km
The value of x is: [2021]
22. Assertion (A) : Time period of oscillation of a liquid (c) 8/9 m (d) 1/9 m
drop depends on surface tension (S), if density of the 26. Two massless springs with spring constant 2k and 9k,
carry 50 g and 100 g masses at their free ends. These
pr 3
liquid is p and radius of the drop is r. then T  k two masses oscillate vertically such that their
s1/2
maximum velocities are equal. Then the ratio of their
is dimensionally correct, where K is dimensionless. respective amplitude will be (JEE Main 2022)
Reason (R): Using dimensional analysis we get R.H.S (a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 2
having different dimension than that of time period. In (c) 3 : 1 (d) 2 : 3
the light of above statements, choose the correct 27. Time period of a simple pendulum in a stationary lift is
answer from the options given below.
g
(JEE Main 2022) ‘T’. If the lift accelerates with vertically upwards
6
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A) then the time period will be:
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct (Where g = acceleration due to gravity)
explanation of (A) (JEE Main 2022)
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false 6 5
(a) T (b) T
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true 5 6
23. The time period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of 6 7
length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle, which (c) T (d) T
7 6
moves without friction down an inclined plane of
28. As per given figures, two springs of spring constants K
inclination α, is given by : (JEE Main 2022)
and 2K are connected to mass m. If the period of
(a) 2 L /  g cos   oscillation in figure (a) is 3s, then the period of
(b) 2 L /  g sin   oscillation in figure (b) will be x s. The value of x is
_____. (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 2 L / g
(d) 2 L /  g tan  
24. In figure (A), mass ‘2 m’ is fixed on mass ‘m’ which is
attached to two springs of spring constant k. In figure
(B), mass ‘m’ is attached to two spring of spring
constant ‘k’ and ‘2k’. If mass ‘m’ in (A) and (B) are
displaced by distance ‘x’ horizontally and then
released, then time period T1 and T2 corresponding to
(A) and (B) respectively follow the relation.
(JEE Main 2022) 29. A mass 0.9 kg, attached to a horizontal spring,
executes SHM with an amplitude A1. When this mass
passed through its mean position, then a smaller mass
of 124 g is placed over it and both masses move
A1 
together with amplitude A2. If the ratio is ,
A2  1
T1 3 T1 3
(a)  (b)  then the value of α will be ____. (JEE Main 2022)
T2 2 T2 2
30. The potential energy of a particle of mass 4 kg in
T1 2 T1 2 motion along the x-axis is given by U = 4(1 – cos 4x)
(c)  (d)  J. The time period of the particle for small oscillation
T2 3 T2 3

25. The length of a seconds pendulum at a height h = 2R  sin     is   . The value of K is ……..
from earth surface will be: (Given: R = Radius of earth K
(JEE Main 2022)
and acceleration due to gravity at the surface of earth
31. The metallic bob of simple pendulum has the relative
g   2 m / s 2 ) (JEE Main 2022) density 5. The time period of this pendulum is 10 s. If
(a) 2/9 m (b) 4/9 m the metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new
time period becomes 5 x s. The value of x will be 37. Choose the correct length  L  versus square of time
________. (JEE Main 2022)
32. A particle executes simple harmonic motion. Its period T 2  graph for a simple pendulum executing
amplitude is 8 cm and time period is 6 s. The time it
simple harmonic motion. (JEE Main 2023)
will take to travel from its position of maximum
displacement to the point corresponding to half of its
amplitude. is ___________ s. (JEE Main 2022)
33. A body of mass 200g is tied to a spring of spring
constant 12.5 N / m , while the other end of spring is
fixed at point O . If the body moves about O in a
circular path on a smooth horizontal surface with (a)
constant angular speed 5 rad / s , then the ratio of
extension in the spring to its natural length will be :
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 2 : 5
34. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between (b)
x   As and x   A . If time taken by particle to go
A
from x  0 to is 2s ; then time taken by particle in
2
A
going from x  to A is: (JEE Main 2023)
2
(a) 3s (b) 2s
(c)
(c) 1.5s (d) 4s
35. For a simple harmonic motion in a mass spring system
shown, the surface is frictionless. When the mass of
the block is 1 kg, the angular frequency is 1 . When
the mass block is 2 kg the angular frequency is 2 .
2
The ratio is: (JEE Main 2023) (d)
1
38. A mass m is attached to two strings as shown in
figure. The spring constants of two springs are K1 and
K 2 . For the frictionless surface, the time period of

oscillation of mass m is (JEE Main 2023)
1
(a) 2 (b)
2
1
(c) 2 (d)
2
36. The maximum potential energy of a block executing 1 K1  K 2 1 K1  K 2
(a) (b)
simple harmonic motion is 25J . A is amplitude of 2 m 2 m
A m m
oscillation. At , the kinetic energy of the block is (c) 2 (d) 2
2 K1  K 2 K1  K 2
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) 37.5 J (b) 9.75 J
(c) 18.75 J (d) 12.5 J
39. A particle executes S.H.M. of amplitude A along x - 42. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion
A (SHM). The ratio of potential energy and kinetic
axis. At t  0 , the position of the particle is x  and energy of the particle when its displacement is half of
2
it moves along positive x -axis. The displacement of its amplitude will be (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 1:3 (b) 2:1
particle in time t is x  A sin t    , then the value (c) 1:4 (d) 1:1
 will be (JEE Main 2023) 43. In a linear Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)
  (A) Restoring force is directly proportional to the
(a) (b) displacement.
6 2
(B) The acceleration and displacement are opposite in
  direction.
(c) (d)
4 3 (C) The velocity is maximum at mean position.
40. For a periodic motion represented by the equation (D) The acceleration is minimum at extreme points.
y  sin t  cos t Choose the correct answer from the options given
the amplitude of the motion is (JEE Main 2023) below: (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 0.5 (b) 2 (a) (A), (B) and (D) Only
(b) (A), (B) and (C) Only
(c) 2 (d) 1
(c) (A), (C) and (D) Only
41. The variation of kinetic energy (KE) of a particle
(d) (C) and (D) Only
executing simple harmonic motion with the
44. Which graph represents the difference between total
displacement  x  starting from mean position to energy and potential energy of a particle executing
extreme position  A is given by (JEE Main 2023) SHM vs it's distance from mean position ?
(JEE Main 2023)
(a)
(a)
(b)
(b)
(c)
(c)
(d)
(d)
45. A particle executes SHM of amplitude A . The 52. In the figure given below. a block of mass M  490g
distance from the mean position when its's kinetic placed on a frictionless table is connected with two
energy becomes equal to its potential energy is:
springs having same spring constant  K  2 Nm 1  . If
(JEE Main 2023)
1 1 the block is horizontally displaced through ' X ' m then
(a) A (b) A the number of complete oscillations it will make in
2 2
14 seconds will be (JEE Main 2023)
(c) 2A (d) 2A
46. A block of mass 2 kg is attached with two identical
springs of spring constant 20 N / m each. The block is
placed on a frictionless surface and the ends of the
springs are attached to rigid supports (see figure).
When the mass is displaced from its equilibrium
position, it executes a simple harmonic motion. The
 53. The amplitude of a particle executing SHM is 3 cm.
time period of oscillation is in SI unit. The value
x The displacement at which its kinetic energy will be
of x is _________. (JEE Main 2023) 25% more than the potential energy is: _____ cm.
(JEE Main 2023)
54. A block is fastened to a horizontal spring. The block is
pulled to a distance x  10cm from its equilibrium
47. A mass m attached to free end of a spring executes position (at x  0 ) on a frictionless surface from rest.
SHM with a period of 1s. If the mass is increased by 3 The energy of the block at x  5cm is 0.25J . The
kg the period of oscillation increases by one second, spring constant of the spring is Nm1 .
the value of mass m is ________ kg.
(JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2023) 55. A simple pendulum with length 100 cm and bob of
48. Two simple harmonic waves having equal amplitudes
mass 250 g is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 10 cm .
of 8 cm and equal frequency of 10 Hz are moving
along the same direction. The resultant amplitude is The maximum tension in the string is found to be
also 8 cm. The phase difference between the individual x
N . The value of x is ______. (JEE Main 2023)
waves is _____ degree. (JEE Main 2023) 40
49. A particle of mass 250g executes a simple harmonic 56. A rectangular block of mass 5 kg attached to a
motion under a periodic force F   25 x  N . The horizontal spiral spring executes simple harmonic
motion of amplitude 1m and time period 3.14 s . The
particle attains a maximum speed of 4m / s during its
maximum force exerted by spring on block is _______
oscillation. The amplitude of the motion is cm.
N (JEE Main 2023)
(JEE Main 2023)
57. At a given point of time the value of displacement of a
50. The general displacement of a simple harmonic
simple harmonic oscillator is given as y  A cos  30  .
oscillator is x  A sin  t . Let T be its time period.
The slope of its potential energy U  - time  t  curve If amplitude is 40 cm and kinetic energy at that time is
x 1
200 J , the value of force constant is 1.0 10 Nm .
T
will be maximum when t  . The value of  is The value of x is ________ (JEE Main 2023)

______. (JEE Main 2023)
51. The velocity of a particle executing SHM varies with
displacement  x  as 4v2  50  x2 . The time period of
x
oscillations is s . The value of x is _____
7
22
(Take   ) (JEE Main 2023)
7
EXERCISE – 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option]
6. The variation of the acceleration a of the particle
1. A simple harmonic motion is represented by executing S.H.M. with displacement x is as shown in
x (t) = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5). The amplitude (A) of the the figure.
S.H.M. is a
a
(a) A = 30 (b) A = 20
(c) A = 10 (d) A = 5
(a) (b)
2. The vertical motion of a ship at sea is described by
d2x x
the equation   4 x , where x is the vertical x
dt 2
a a
height of the ship (in metre) above its mean position.
If it oscillates up to a height of 1 m from its mean
position. (c) x (d) x
(a) its maximum vertical speed will be 1 m/s
(b) its maximum vertical speed will be 2 m/s
(c) its greatest vertical acceleration is 2 m/s2 7. What is the maximum acceleration of the particle
(d) its greatest vertical acceleration is 1 m/s2 doing the SHM
3. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic  t 
motion (S.H.M.) about x = 0 under the influence of a y  2sin     , where y is in cm.
2 
force shown below: The period of the S.H.M. is
 2
(a) cm/s 2 (b) cm/s2
2 2
 2
(c) cm/s 2 (d) cm/s2
4 4
8. The acceleration a of a particle undergoing SHM is
(a) 1.05 s (b) 0.52 s shown in the figure. Which of the labelled points
(c) 0.25 s (d) 0.30 s corresponds to the particle being at –xmax?
4. If a particle under S.H.M. has time period 0.1 sec and
amplitude 2 × 10–3 m. It has maximum velocity
 
(a) m/ s (b) m/ s
25 26

(c) m/ s (d) None of these
30
(a) 4 (b) 3
5. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(c) 2 (d) 1
which of the following statements is not correct
9. The equation of motion of a particle executing simple
(a) The total energy of the particle always remains the
same harmonic motion is a  16p2 x  0 . In this equation, a
(b) The restoring force is always directed towards a is the linear acceleration in m/s2 of the particle at a
fixed point displacement x in metre. The time period in simple
(c) The restoring force is maximum at the extreme harmonic motion is
positions 1 1
(a) s (b) s
(d) The acceleration of the particle is maximum at the 4 2
equilibrium position. (c) 1 s (d) 2 s
10. The displacement of a particle moving in S.H.M. at (c) 0.4 m (d) 0.1 m
any instant is given by y  a sin t . The acceleration 18. The displacement time equation of a particle
T executing SHM is: x  A sin  t    . At time t = 0
after time t  is (where T is the time period)
4 A
position of the particle is x  and it is moving
(a) a (b) a 2
2
(c) a (d)  a 2 along negative x-direction. Then the angle  can be:
11. The potential energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is
2.5 J, when its displacement is half of amplitude. The
 
total energy of the particle is (a) (b)
6 3
(a) 18 J (b) 10 J
(c) 12 J (d) 2.5 J 2 5
(c) (d)
12. A particle is vibrating in a simple harmonic motion 3 6
with amplitude 4 cm. At what distance from the 19. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the
equilibrium is its energy half potential and half  
equations y1  0.1sin 100 t   and
kinetic?  3
(a) 2 2 cm (b) 2 cm y2  0.1cos  t . The phase difference of the velocity
(c) 3 cm (d) 1 cm of particle 1 with respect to the velocity of particle 2
13. Energy of particle executing SHM depends upon is
(a) amplitude only  
(b) amplitude and frequency (a) (b)
3 6
(c) velocity only
 
(d) frequency only (c) (d)
14. A particle of mass 0.10 kg executes SHM with an 6 3
20. If < E > and < U > denote the average kinetic and the
amplitude 0.05 m and frequency 20 Hz. Its energy of
average potential energies respectively of mass
oscillation is [given :  2  10]
describing a simple harmonic motion, over one
(a) 2 J (b) 4 J period, then the correct relation is
(c) 1 J (d) zero (a) < E > = < U > (b) < E > = 2 <U >
15. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with (c) < E > = – 2 <U > (d) < E >= – < U >
a period of T seconds and amplitude a metre. The
21. The following figure depicts a circular motion. The
a
shortest time it takes to reach a point m from its radius of the circle, the period of revolution, the
2 initial position and the sense of revolution are
mean position in seconds is indicated on the figure. The simple harmonic motion
T of the x–projection of the radius vector of the rotating
(a) T (b)
4 particle P can be shown as :
T T
(c) (d)
8 16
16. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through
the mean position, its KE is 8 × 10-3 J. Find the
equation of motion of the particle, if the initial phase
of oscillation is 45°
 2 t  
    (a) x  t   a cos   
(a) y  0.1cos  3t   (b) y  0.1sin  6t    4 4
 4  4
t  
    (b) x  t   a cos   
(c) y  0.1sin  4t   (d) y  0.1cos  4t    4 4
 4  4
 2 t  
17. A particle of mass 0.1 kg executes SHM under a force (c) x  t   a sin   
 4 4
F = (–10x) Newton. Speed of particle at mean
t  
position is 6 m/s. Then amplitude of oscillations is (d) x  t   a cos   
(a) 0.6 m (b) 0.2 m  3 2
22. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass
straight line. In first s, after starting from rest it 2 kg in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J
travels a distance a, and in next  s it travels 2a, in and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
same direction, then :  
(a) s (b) s
(a) time period of oscillations is 8 100 50
(b) amplitude of motion is 4a  
(c) time period of oscillations is 6 (c)   s (d) none of these
 20 
(d) amplitude of motion is 3a
30. Two particles are executing SHM in a straight line.
23. In SHM for how many times potential energy is equal
Amplitude A and time period T of both the particles
to kinetic energy during one complete period?
are equal. At time t = 0, one particle is at
(a) 1 (b) 2
A
(c) 4 (d) 8 displacement x1 = +A and the other at x 2  and
2
24. Velocity at mean position of a particle executing
they are approaching towards each other. After what
SHM is v. Velocity of the particle at a distance equal
time they cross each other?
to half of the amplitude will be
v
T T
v (a) (b)
(a) (b) 3 4
2 2
5T T
3 3 (c) (d)
(c) v (d) v 6 6
2 4
25. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion 31. A particle is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 5 cm and
with an amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 period 6 sec. How long will it take to move from one
cm from the mean position the magnitude of its end of its path on one side of mean position to a
velocity is equal to that of its acceleration. Then its position 2.5 cm on the same side of the mean
time period in seconds is position?
1 (a) 1.5 sec (b) 1 sec
(a) (b) 2 3 (c) 3 sec (d) 3.5 sec
2 3
32. A particle executing harmonic motion is having
2 3
(c) (d) velocities v1 and v2 at distance x1 and x2 from the
3 2
equilibrium position. The amplitude of the motion is
26. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic
motion with amplitude a and frequency  . The v12 x 22  v 22 x12 v12 x12  v 22 x 22
(a) (b)
average kinetic energy during its motion from the v12  v 22 v12  v 22
position of equilibrium to the ends is
v12 x 22 - v 22 x12 v12 x 22  v 22 x12
(a) 2 2 ma 2 2 (b)  2 ma 2 2 (c) (d)
v12 - v 22 v12  v 22
1
(c)  2 ma 2 2 (d) 4 2 ma 2 v 2 33. A certain simple harmonic vibrator of mass 0.1 kg has
4
27. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is a total energy of 10 J. Its displacement from the mean
made two times keeping the maximum speed to be position is 1cm when it has equal kinetic and
constant. It is possible when potential energies. The amplitude A and frequency f
(a) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while of vibration of the vibrator are
frequency remains constant 500
(a) A  2 cm, f  Hz
(b) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved π
(c) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved 1000
(d) frequency of oscillation is doubled while (b) A  2 cm, f  Hz
π
amplitude remains constant
1 500
t (c) A  cm, f  Hz
28. A particle moves according to the law x = a cos . 2 π
2
The distance covered by it in the time interval 1 1000
(d) A  cm, f  Hz
between t = 0 to t = 3 s is 2 π
(a) 2a (b) 3a
(c) 4a (d) 5a
34. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic (c) Quadruple the mass
oscillations about the origin on the x-axis. Its (d) Reduce the mass to one-fourth
41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
potential energy is U(x)  k x 3 , where k is a positive from two separate massless springs of force constants
constant. If the amplitude of oscillation is a, then its k1 and k 2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
time period T is vertically such that their maximum velocities are
1 equal, the ratio of the amplitude M to that of N is
(a) proportional to (b) proportional to a
a k1 k1
(a) (b)
(c) proportional to a (d) proportional a 3/ 2 k2 k2
35. The displacement of the particle from its mean k2 k2
position (in metre) is given by (c) (d)
k1 k1
y = 0.2 sin (10t + 1.5) cos (10t + 1.5).
42. In arrangement given in figure, if the block of mass m
The motion of the particle is is displaced, the frequency is given by
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic motion
(b) non periodic
(c) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.1 s
(d) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.2 s.
36. Maximum velocity in SHM is v m . The average 1 k1 – k2 1 k1  k2
(a) f  (b) f 
velocity during motion from one extreme point to the 2 m 2 m
other extreme point will be: 1 m 1 m
(c) f  (d) f 
π 2 2 k1  k2 2 k1 – k2
(a) v m (b) v m
2 π 43. Three masses 700 g, 500 g, and 400 g are suspended
4 π at the end of as spring as shown and are in
(c) v m (d) v m equilibrium. When the 700g mass is removed, the
π 4
37. Force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A system oscillates with a period of 3 seconds, when the
500 gm mass is also removed, it will oscillate with a
body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down period of
through 5 cm from its mean position and then
released. The maximum kinetic energy of the body
will be
(a) 2 × 10–2 J (b) 4 × 10–2 J
(c) 8 × 10–2 J (d) 16 × 10–2 J
38. A particle is attached to a vertical spring and is pulled
down a distance 0.04 m below its equilibrium (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
position and is released from rest. The initial upward 12
(c) 3 s (d) s
acceleration of the particle is 0.30 m/s2. The period of 5
the oscillation is 44. On a smooth inclined plane, a body of mass M is
(a) 4.08 s (b) 1.92 s attached between two springs. The other ends of the
(c) 3.90 s (d) 2.29 s springs are fixed to firm supports. If each spring has
force constant k, the period of oscillation of the body
39. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The
(assuming the springs as massless) is
particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the
highest point of its oscillation the spring is
unstretched. Maximum speed of the particle is: (g =
10 m/s2)
(a) 2 m / s (b)  m / s
1 1
(c) m/s m/s
(d) 1/ 2 1/ 2
 2 M   2M 
(a) 2   (b) 2  
40. To make the frequency double of an oscillator, we K  K 
have to Mg sin   2 Mg 
1/ 2
(a) Double the mass (c) 2 (d) 2  

2K  K 
(b) Half the mass
45. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 48. A block of mass m, attached to a fixed position O on
2k, k and 2 k respectively are attached to a mass M a smooth inclined wedge of mass M, oscillates with
kept on a frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the amplitude A and angular frequency  . The wedge is
mass M is displaced in the horizontal direction, then located on a rough horizontal surface and the wedge
the frequency of the system. doesn’t move. If the angle of the wedge is 60°, then
the force of friction acting on the wedge is given by
(coefficient of static friction = )
1 k 1 4k
(a) (b)
2 4M 2 M
1 k 1 7k
(c) (d)
2 7M 2 M (a)  (M + m) g
46. m1 and m2 are connected with a light inextensible 1
(b) m 2 A sin t
string with m1 lying on smooth table and m2 hanging 2
as shown in figure. m1 is also connected to a light (c)   M  m   2 A sin  t
spring which is initially unstretched and the system is  3 
released from rest (d)   M  m  g  m 2 A sin t 
 2 
49. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the
springs of stiffness k is in contact with the completely
elastic wall, and the compression in the spring is x.
The spring is compressed further by x by displacing
the block towards left and is then released. If the
collision between the block and the wall is completely
(a) system will perform SHM with angular frequency elastic then the time period of oscillations of the
block will be:
k  m1  m2 
given by .
m1m2
(b) system performs SHM with angular frequency
k
given by . 2 m m
m1  m2 (a) (b) 2
3 k k
(c) tension in string will be 0 when the system is
released.  m  m
(c) (d)
mg 3 k 6 k
(d) maximum displacement of m1 will be 2 .
k 50. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having
47. A massless rod is pivoted at point O. A string cross-sectional area A is suspended with its length
carrying a mass m at one end is attached to the point vertical from a fixed point by a light spring such that
A on the rod. The period of small vertical oscillation
it is half submerged in a liquid of density  at
of mass m around its equilibrium position is:
equilibrium position. When the cylinder is given a
small downward push and released it starts oscillating
with small amplitudes. If the spring has a force
constant k, then its time period of oscillations will be
M M
(a) T  2 (b) T  2
A g k
a m a m M
(a) T  2 (b) T   (c) T  2 (d) none of these
b k b k k  A g
b m b m
(c) T  2 (d) T  
a k a k
51. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a 54. A mass M = 5 kg is attached to a spring a shown in
vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m the figure and held in position, so that the spring
resting on a smooth horizontal surface. There is remains unstretched. The spring constant is 200 N/m.
another wall at a distance x0 from the black. The The mass M is, then released and begins to undergo
spring is then compressed by 2x0 and released. The small oscillations. The amplitude of oscillation is
time taken to strike the wall is
2x0 x0
1 k k
(a)  (b)
6 m m (a) 0.5 m (b) 0.25 m
(c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
2 m  k
(c) (d) 55. A spring has a natural length of 50 cm and a force
3 k 4 m
constant of 2.0 × 103 Nm–1. A body of mass 10 kg is
52. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats in
suspended from it and the spring is stretched. If the
a liquid of density  with its upper and lower surfaces body is pulled down to a length of 58 cm and
horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and released, it executes simple harmonic motion. What is
the net force on the body when it is at its lowermost
released, it performs simple harmonic motion of
position of its oscillation? (Take g = 10 ms–2)
period T. Then T is equal to (a) 20 N (b) 40 N
(c) 60 N (d) 80 N
 d
(a) 2 (b) 2 56. A spring of force constant 200 N/m is mounted as
  d g g
shown in figure and a mass 2 kg is attached to the free
end. If the system is given an initial displacement of
 d
(c) 2 (d) 2 0.05 m and an initial velocity of 2 m/sec, find the
dg   d g amplitude of simple harmonic motion.
53. The friction coefficient between two blocks of masses
1 kg and 4 kg shown in figure is  and the horizontal
plane surface is smooth. If the system is slight
displaced from the mean position and released, it will (a) 0.4 m (b) 0.206 m
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.5 m
execute SHM. The maximum amplitude for which the
57. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2:3,
upper block does not slip relative to the lower will be then their length are in ratio
–(k is spring constant) (a) 2/3 (b) 3/ 2
4 9
(c) (d)
9 4
58. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of
length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which
moves without friction down an inclined plane of
5g g inclination  , is given by
(a) (b)
k k
L L
(a) 2 (b) 2
3g 2g g cos  g sin 
(c) (d)
k k
L L
(c) 2 (d) 2
g g tan 
59. In case of a simple pendulum, time period versus 62. A uniform rod of length L is suspended from a point
length is depicted by P and is made to undergo small oscillations. Time
period of oscillation is (O is centre of mass):
(a) (b)
3L L
(a) 2 (b) 2
g g
(c) (d)
7L L
(c) 2 (d) 2
12 g 12 g
63. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-

60. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2s is air. If section A floats in a liquid of density  . If it is given
whole arrangement is placed in non-viscous liquid
small vertical displacement from equilibrium, it
1
whose density is times the density of bob. The undergoes oscillation with a time period T, then
2
time period in the liquid will be: (a) T  m (b) T  ρ
2
(a) s (b) 4 s 1 1
2 (c) T  (d) T 
A 
(c) 2 2 s (d) 4 2 s
61. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted 64. A U tube of uniform bore of cross-sectional area A
smoothly at one end. The rod’s other end is supported has been set up vertically with open ends facing up.
by a spring of force constant k. The rod is rotated (in Now M gm of a liquid of density d is poured into it.
The column of liquid in this tube will oscillate with a
vertical plane) by a small angle  from its horizontal
period T such that
equilibrium position and released. The angular
frequency of the subsequent simple harmonic motion M MA
(a) T  2 (b) T  2
g gd
is
M M
(c) T  2 (d) T  2
gdA 2 Adg
65. The metallic bob of a simple pendulum has the

relative density  . The time period of this pendulum
3k k is T. If the metallic bob is immersed in water, then the

(a) (b)
m 3m new time period is given by
3k 3 g k
 1 
(c)  (d) (a) T (b) T
m 2L m   1
 1 
(c) T (d) T
  1
66. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a m1 is removed without disturbing the system, as a
vertical wall and the other to a body of mass m result of this removal mass m2 performs simple
resting on a smooth horizontal surface. There is harmonic motion. For this situation mark the correct
another wall at a distance x0 from the body. The statement(s).
spring is then compressed by 3x0 and released. The
time taken to strike the wall from the instant of
release is
–1
(given sin (1/3) = (/9))
m1 g
(a) the amplitude of oscillation is
 m 2 m k
(a) (b)
6 k 3 k  m1  m2  g
(b) the amplitude of oscillation is
 m 11 m k
(c) (d)
4 k 18 k (c) the system oscillates with angular frequency
67. A mass m is suspended from a spring of force k
constant k and just touches another identical spring m2
fixed to the floor as shown in the figure. The time
(d) the system oscillates with angular frequency
period of small oscillations is
k
 m1  m2 
70. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic
motions along x and y directions according to x = 3
sin 100 t and y = 4sin 100 t
(a) Motion of particle will be on ellipse travelling in
m m m clockwise direction.
(a) 2 (b)   (b) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with
k k k /2
slope 4/3.
m m m
(c)  (d)   (c) Motion will be simple harmonic motion with
3k / 2 k 2k amplitude 5.
Objective Questions II (d) Phase difference between two motions is /2.
[One or more than one correct option] 71. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross
section A floats on a liquid of density . If it is given
68. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform, which
a small displacement, it oscillates with a period T,
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular
then
frequency  . The amplitude of oscillation is
gradually increased. The coin will leave contact with (a) T  m (b) T  
the platform for the first time 1 1
(c) T  (d) T 
(a) at the highest position of the platform A r
(b) at the mean position of the platform 72. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1kg,
g moving along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x – 4)J,
(c) for an amplitude of
2 where x is in meter. It can be concluded that
g (a) the particle is acted upon by a constant force.
(d) for an amplitude of
 (b) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.
69. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a (c) the particle executes SHM.
light spring of spring constant k as shown in the 
(d) the period of oscillation of the particle is s .
figure. When the system is in equilibrium, the mass 5
73. The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is n

simple harmonic with amplitude  A 2  B 2  , find the
k r2  value of n
given by,     2  where k is the spring
 m 4m 
80. The displacement equation of a particle is
constant, m is the mass of the oscillator and r is the
x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
r2
damping constant. If the ratio is 8%, the change The product of magnitude of amplitude and
mk
in time period compared to the undamped oscillator is magnitude of maximum velocity will be:
approximately as follows: 81. The equation of a SHM is given by
(a) increases by 8% (b) decreases by 8% x  4sin 5 t  4cos5 t , where x is in cm and time t
(c) increases by 1% (d) decrease by 1% is in seconds. Find the phase constant (in degrees) of
74. A body is in simple harmonic motion with time the motion.
period half second (T = 0.5 s) and amplitude one cm
82. A particle undergoing SHM has the equation:
(A = 1 cm). Find the average velocity in the interval
x  A sin  t    , where x represents the
in which it moves from equilibrium position to half of
its amplitude. displacement of the particle. The kinetic energy
(a) 6 cm/s (b) 4 cm/s n
oscillates with time period find the value of n.
(c) 16 cm/s (d) 12 cm/s 
Numerical Value Type Questions 83. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg in motion
along the x–axis is given by: U = 4 (1 – cos 2x) J
75. The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of
earth. The period of a second’s pendulum on this Here x is in metres. The period of small oscillations

planet is 2 n . Find the value of n. (in sec) is , find the value of n.
n
76. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum
inside a stationary lift and finds it to be T sec. If the Assertion Reason
g (A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
lift accelerates upwards with an acceleration , then
4 is the correct explanation of the assertion.
2T (B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
the period of the pendulum becomes . Find the not the correct explanation of the assertion.
n
value of n. (C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(D) If the assertion and reason both are false.
84. Assertion (A): In extreme position of a particle
executing S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are
zero.
Reason (R): In S.H.M., acceleration always acts
77. The length of second’s pendulum of the earth is 1 .
towards mean position.
And the length of second’s pendulum on the moon is (a) A (b) B
 (c) C (d) D
 2 . Find the value of 1
2 85. Assertion (A): Water in a U-tube executes SHM, the
78. In a seconds pendulum, mass of the bob is 30 g. If it time period for mercury filled upto the same height in
is replaced by 90 g mass then its time period (in sec) the U-tube bc greater than that in case of water.
will be Reason (R): Thc amplitude of an oscillating

pendulum goes on increasing.
79. The motion of a particle is given as
(a) A (b) B
x  A sin t  B cos t . The motion of the particle is
(c) C (d) D
86. Assertion (A): The percentage change in time period 89. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a block
is 1.5%. If the length of simple pendulum increases attached to a spring with k = 200 N/m. The block
slides on a frictionless horizontal surface, with
by 3%.
equilibrium point x = 0. A graph of the block’s
Reason (R): Time period is directly proportional to velocity v as a function of time t is shown. Correctly
length of pendulum. match the required information in Column I with the
2
values given in Column II (use  = 10):
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
87. Assertion (A): All oscillatory motions are necessarily
periodic motion, but all periodic motions are not
oscillatory.
Reason (R): Simple pendulum is an example of
Column-I Column-II
oscillatory motion. (a) The block’s mass in kg (p) –200
(a) A (b) B (b) The block’s displacement (q) 0.20
(c) C (d) D at t = 0 in metres
(c) The block’s acceleration (r) 4.0
2
Match the Following at t = 0.10s in m/s
(d) The block’s maximum (s) –0.20
Each question has two columns. Four options are given kinetic energy in joules
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Paragraph Type Questions
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to Using the following passage, solve Q. 90 to 92
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option Passage - 1
corresponding to the correct matching. One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin O and
the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis. A block of mass m =
88. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0. Their 1kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is performing
positions as function of time are given by SHM. Equation of position of the block in co-ordinate
system shown in figure is x = 10 + 3sin (10t), where t is in
XA = A sin t second and x in cm.
XB = A sin t + /3) Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the origin
with velocity 30 cm/s collides with the block performing
Column-I Column-II SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it.
(a) Minimum time (p) 
when x is same 3
(b) Minimum time (q) 
when velocity is  90. Angular frequency of oscillation after collision is
same
(c) 100 rad/s (d) 50 rad/s
(c) Minimum time (r)  91. New amplitude of oscillation is
after which 2 (a) 3 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 10 cm (d) 100 cm
vA < 0 and vB < 0
92. New equation for position of the combined body is
(d) Minimum time (s) 5 (a) (10 + 3 sin 5t) cm (b) (10 – 3 sin 5t) cm
after which 6 (c) (10 + 3 cos 10 t) cm (d) (10 – 3 cos 10t) cm
xA < 0 and xB < 0

Using the following passage, solve Q. 93 to 95

Passage - 2
A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a massive
vertical spring of spring constant k = 4 mg/L and natural
length ‘10L’. The lower end of spring is free and is at a
height L from fixed horizontal floor as shown. The spring is
initially unstressed, and the spring-block system is released
from rest in the shown position.
96. When the block is at position A on the graph, its

(a) position and velocity both are negative
(b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
93. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, the (c) position is negative, and velocity is positive
magnitude of force exerted by the spring on the block (d) position and velocity both the positive
is 97. When the block is at position B on the graph, its
mg (a) position and velocity are positive
(a) (b) mg
2 (b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
(c) zero (d) None of these (c) position in negative and velocity is positive
94. As the block is coming down, the maximum speed (d) position and velocity are negative
attained by the block is 98. When the block is at position C on the graph, its
(a) gL (b) 3gL (a) velocity is maximum, and acceleration is zero
(b) velocity is minimum, and acceleration is zero
3 3 (c) velocity is zero and acceleration is negative
(c) gL (d) gL
2 2 (d) velocity is zero and acceleration is positive
95. Till the block reaches its lowest position for the first 99. Position of the block as a function of time can now be
time, the time duration for which the spring remains expressed as
compressed is  
(a) x  3cos 16t   cm
L L 1  2
(a)   sin 1
2g 4g 3  
(b) x  3cos 16t   cm
 L L 1  3
(b)  sin 1
4 g 4g 3  
(c) x  3.5cos  16t   cm
L L 2  6
(c)   sin 1
2g 4g 3   
(d) x  3.2 cos 16t   cm
 L L 2  4
(d)  sin 1 100. Velocity of the block as a function of time can be
2 2g 4g 3
expressed as
Using the following passage, solve Q. 96 to 100  
(a) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
Passage - 3  2
A 100 g block is connected to a horizontal massless spring  
(b) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
of force constant 25.6 N/m. As shown in figure (a), the block  3
is free to oscillate on a horizontal frictionless surface. The
 
block is displaced 3 cm from the equilibrium position and, at (c) v  56sin 16t   cm / s
t = 0, it is released from rest at x= 0. It executes simple  4
harmonic motion with the positive x-direction indicated in  
figure (a). (d) v  56sin 16t   cm / s
 6
The position-time(x-t) graph of motion of the block is as
shown in figure (b).
EXERCISE – 4: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

When a particle of mass m moves on the x–axis in a 5. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point of
potential of the form V(x) = kx2, it performs simple suspension is now moved upward according to the
harmonic motion. The corresponding time period is relation y = kt2, (k = 1 m/s2) where y is the vertical
displacement. The time period now becomes T2 The
m
proportional to , as can be seen easily using T12
k ratio of is
dimensional analysis. However, the motion of a particle can T22
be periodic even when its potential energy increases on both (Take g = 10 m/s2) [2005]
sides of x = 0 in a way different from kx2 and its total energy 6 5
(a) (b)
is such that the particle does not escape to infinity. Consider 5 6
a particle of mass m moving on the x–axis. Its potential 4
energy is V(x) = ax4 (a > 0) for |x| near the origin and (c) 1 (d)
5
becomes a constant equal to V0 for |x| > X0 (see figure)
V(x) 6. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical
direction about the mean position y 0 with amplitude
A and angular frequency  . At a distance y from
V0
the mean position, the mass detaches from the spring.
Assume that the spring contracts and does not
x
X0 obstruct the motion of m.
*
1. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform Find the distance y . (measured from the mean
periodic motion only if [2004] position) such that the height h attained by the block
(a) E < 0 (b) E > 0 is maximum.
(c) V0 > E > 0 (d) E > V0 A 2  g  [2005]
2. For periodic motion of small amplitude, A, the time
period T of this particle is proportional to [2004]
m 1 m
(a) A (b)
 A 
 1 
(c) A (d)
m A m
3. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is [2004]
V
(a) proportional to V0 (b) proportional to 0
mX 0 7. Function x  A sin 2  t  B cos 2  t  C sin  t cos t
V0 represents SHM: [2006]
(c) proportional to (d) zero
mX 0 (a) For any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
4. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal (b) If A = –B, C = 2 B, amplitude = B 2
frictionless plane. A second block of same mass m is
placed on it and is connected to a spring of spring (c) If A = B; C = 0
constant k, the two blocks are pulled by a distance A. (d) If A = B; C = 2 B, amplitude = |B|
Block Q oscillates without slipping. What is the
maximum value of frictional force between the two
blocks? [2004]
kA
(a) (b) kA
2
(c) s mg (d) zero
8. Column–I describes some situation in which a small 9. Column-I gives a list of possible set of parameters
object moves. Column–II describes some measured in some experiments. The variations of the
characteristics of these motions. Match the situations parameters in the form of graphs are shown in
in Column–I with the characteristic in Column–II. Column-II. Match the set of parameters given in
[2007] Column-I with the graphs given in Column-II.
Column-I Column-II Indicate your answer by darkening the appropriate
(a) The object moves on the (p) The object bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS. [2008]
x–axis executes under a is Column-I Column-II
conservative force in performing (a) Potential energy of (p)
such a way that its simple a simple pendulum
“speed” and “position” harmonic (y-axis) as a
satisfy v  c c  x 2 motion. function of
1 2
displacement
,where c1 and c2 are
(x-axis)
positive constants.
(b) The object moves on the (q) The object (b) Displacement (y- (q)
x–axis in such a way does not axis) as a function
that its velocity and its change its of time (x-axis) for
displacement from the direction a one dimensional
origin satisfy v = –kx, motion at zero or
where k is a positive constant
constant. acceleration when
(c) The object is attached to (r) The kinetic the body is moving
one end of a mass–less energy of along the positive
spring of a given spring the object x-direction.
constant. The other end keeps on (c) Range of a (r)
of the spring is attached decreasing projectile (y-axis)
to the ceiling of an as a function of its
elevator. Initially velocity (x-axis)
everything is at rest. The when projected at a
elevator starts going fixed angle.
upwards with a constant (d) The square of the (s)
acceleration a. The time period (y-axis)
motion of the object is of a simple
observed from the pendulum as a
elevator during the function of its
period it maintains this length (x-axis).
acceleration. 10. The x–t graph of a particle undergoing simple
(d) The object is projected (s) The object harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration of
from the earth’s surface can change the particle at t = 4/3 s is: [2009]
vertically upwards its direction
GM e only once.
2 , where Me is
Re
the mass of the earth and
Re is the radius of the
earth. Neglect forces
from objects other than 3 2  2
(a)  cm s 2 (b) cm s 2
the earth. 32 32
2 3 2
(c) cm s 2 (d)   cm s 2
32 32
11. A uniform rod of length l and mass M is pivoted at (d) of changed frequency and with the same mean
the centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of position
equal spring constant k. The springs are fixed to rigid 15. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
supports as shown in the figure, and rod is free to sinusoidal displacements in x–direction,
oscillate in the horizontal plane. The rod is gently  2 
x1 (t) = A sin t and x2 (t) = A sin  t  .
pushed through a small angle  in one direction and  3 
released. The frequency of oscillation is [2009] Adding a third sinusoidal displacement
x3(t) = B sin (t + ) brings the mass to a complete
rest. The value of B and  are [2011]
3 4
(a) 2 A, (b) A,
1 2k 1 k 4 3
(a) (b)
2 M 2 M 5 
(c) 3 A, (d) A,
1 6k 1 24k 6 3
(c) (d)
2 M 2 M 16. A metal rod of length L and mass m is pivoted at one
12. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple end. A thin disk of mass M and radius R (< L) is
harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of attached at its centre of the free end of the rod.
the point P is [2009] Consider two ways the disc is attached.
Case A – the disc is not free to rotate about its centre
and
k1 A k2 A Case B – the disc is free to rotate about its centre.
(a) (b) The rod-disc system performs SHM in vertical plane
k2 k1
after being released from the same displaced position.
k1 A k2 A
(c) (d) Which of the following statement(s) is/are true?
k1  k2 k1  k2
[2011]
13. A 0.1 kg mass is suspended from a wire of negligible
mass. The length of the wire is 1 m and its cross-
sectional area is 4.9  10 7 m 2 . If the mass is pulled a
little in the vertically downward direction and
released, it performs simple harmonic motion of
angular frequency 140 rad s-1. If the Young’s modulus
of the material of the wire is n×109 Nm-2 the value of
n is
[2010] (a) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in
14. A wooden block performs SHM on a frictionless case B
surface with frequency f 0 . The block carries a charge (b) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in
 case B
+Q on its surface. If now a uniform electric field E (c) Angular frequency for case A > Angular
is switched-on as shown, then the SHM of the block frequency for case B
will be [2011] (d) Angular frequency for case A < Angular
frequency for case B
(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean

position
(b) of the same frequency and with the same mean
position
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean
position
17. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass- 19. A block with mass M is connected by a massless
less spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless spring with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and
horizontal plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. moves without friction on a horizontal surface. The
The particle starts moving horizontally from its block oscillates with small amplitude A about an
equilibrium position at time t = 0 with an initial equilibrium position x0. Consider two cases: (i) when
velocity u0. When the speed of the particle is 0.5 u0, it the block is at x0; and (ii) when the block is at x = x0 +
collides elastically with a rigid wall. After this A. In both the cases, a particle with mass m (< M) is
collision [2013] softly placed on the block after which they stick to
(a) the speed of the particle when it returns to its each other. Which of the following statement (s) is
equilibrium position is u0 (are) true about the motion after the mass m is placed
(b) the time at which the particle passes through the on the mass M? [2016]
m (a) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case
equilibrium position for the first time is t  
k M
changes by a factor of , whereas in the
(c) the time at which the maximum compression of mM
4 m second case it remains unchanged
the spring occurs is t  (b) The final time period of oscillation in both the
3 k
cases is same
(d) the time at which the particle passes through the
(c) The total energy decreases in both the cases
equilibrium position for the second time is
(d) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined
5 m
t masses decreases in both the cases
3 k
20. A block of mass 2M is attached to a massless spring
18. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass
with spring-constant k. This block is connected to two
are oscillating about the origin with angular
other blocks of masses M and 2M using two massless
frequencies  and  and have total energies E1 and pulleys and strings. The accelerations of the blocks
E2, respectively, The variation of their momenta p are a1,a2, and a3 as shown in the figure. The system is
a released from rest with spring in its unstretched state.
with positions x are shown in the figures. If = n2
b The maximum extension of the spring is x0. Which of
a the following option(s) is/are correct? [g is the
and = n, then the correct equation(s) is (are)
R acceleration due to gravity. Neglect friction] [2019]
[2015]

(a) E11 = E2 2 (b)  n2 x0
 (a) At an extension of of the spring, the
4
E1 E2 magnitude of acceleration of the block connected
(c) 2 1 = n2 (d) 
 2 3g
to the spring is
10
4Mg
(b) x0 
k
x
(c) When spring achieves an extension of 0 for the
2
first time, the speed of the block connected to the
M
spring is 3 g
5k
(d) a2-a1=a1-a3
21. List I describes four systems, each with two particles horizontal circular path of
A and B in relative motion as shown in figures. List II radius 1 on the xy plane,
gives possible magnitudes of their relative velocities with constant angular speed
(in ms-1) at time t 

s.
  1rad s 1 . Particle B is
3 moving up at a constant speed
List-I List-II 3 s-1 in the vertical direction
(I) A and B are moving on a 3 1 as shown in the figure. (Ignore
horizontal circle of radius 1 (P) gravity.)
2
with uniform angular speed
  1 rad s 1 . The initial
angular positions of A and B at

time = 0 are = 0 and  
2
, respectively.
(T) 25 2  1
Which one of the following options is correct?
(a) I → R, II → T, III → P, IV → S
(b) I → S, II → P, III → Q, IV → R
(c) I → S, II → T, III → P, IV → R
(II) Projectiles A and B are (d) I → T, II → P, III → R, IV → S
fired (in the same vertical (Q)
 3 1  [2022]
plane) at t  0 and t  0.1 s 2 22. On a frictionless horizontal plane, a bob of mass m =
0.1 kg is attached to a spring with natural length l0=
respectively, with the same 0.1 m. The spring constant is k1= 0.009 Nm-1 when
5 the length of the spring l > l0 and the spring constant
speed v  ms 1 and 45°
2 is k2= 0.016 Nm-1 when the length of the spring l < l0.
from the horizontal plane. The Initially the bob is released from l = 0.15 m. Assume
initial separation between A that Hooke’s law remains valid throughout the
and Bis large enough so that motion. If the time period of the full oscillation is
they do not collide. ( T   n  s, then the integer closest to n is _______.
g  10 ms 2 ). [2022]
23. Two point-like objects of masses 20 gm and 30 gm
are fixed at the two ends of a rigid massless rod of
length 10 cm. This system is suspended vertically
from a rigid ceiling using a thin wire attached to its
center of mass, as shown in the figure. The resulting
torsional pendulum undergoes small oscillations. The
(III) Two harmonic oscillators torsional constant of the wire is 1.2  108 N m rad 1 .
(R) 10
A and B moving in the x The angular frequency of the oscillations in
direction according n 10 3 rad s 1 . The value of n is _____.
t
to x A  x0 sin and
t0
t 
xB  x0 sin   
 t0 2 
respectively, starting from
t  0 . Take x0 = 1m, t0 = 1 s.
[2023]
(IV) Particle A is rotating in a (S) 2


13
WAVES
WAVESChapter 13 118
WAVES
(ii) Based on energy propagation: Waves can be
divided into two parts on the basis of energy
1. INTRODUCTION AND CLASSIFICATION OF propagation (i) Progressive wave (ii) Stationary
WAVES waves. The progressive wave propagates with
constant velocity in a medium.
Introduction of waves: When a particle moves through In stationary waves particles of the medium vibrate
space, it carries KE with itself. Wherever the particle with different amplitude but energy does not
goes, the energy goes with it. (One way of transporting propagate.
energy from one place to another place). (iii) Based on direction of propagation: Waves can be
There is another way (wave motion) to transport energy one, two or three dimensional according to the
from one part of space to other without any bulk motion number of dimensions in which they propagate
of material together with it. Sound is transmitted in air energy. Waves moving along strings are one-
in this manner. dimensional. Surface waves or ripples on water are
two dimensional, while sound or light waves from
NOTE:
a point source are three dimensional.
A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space, (iv) Based on the motion of particles of medium:
transport energy and momentum from one point to
another without the transport of matter.
Few Examples of waves: The ripples on a pond (water
waves), the sound we hear, visible light, radio and TV
signals etc.
Waves are of two types on the basis of motion of
1.1. Classification of waves
particles of the medium.
(i) Longitudinal waves
(ii) Transverse waves
In the transverse wave the direction associated with
the disturbance (i.e. motion of particles of the
medium) is at right angle to the direction of
(i) Based on medium necessity: A wave may or may propagation of wave while in the longitudinal wave
not require a medium for its propagation. The the direction of disturbance is along the direction of
waves which do not require medium for their propagation.
propagation are called non-mechanical, e.g. light,
1.2. Transverse Wave Motion
heat (infrared), radio waves etc. On the other hand
the waves which require medium for their Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such type
propagation are called mechanical waves. In the of medium which have shearing property, so they are
propagation of mechanical waves elasticity and known as shear wave or S-wave
density of the medium play an important role
therefore mechanical waves are also known as
elastic waves.
Example:
Waves in water, sound waves, seismic waves in
earth’s crust.
Fig. 13.1
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 119
 A mechanical wave will be transverse or

longitudinal depending on the nature of medium
and mode of excitation.
NOTE:  In strings, mechanical waves are always transverse
Shearing is the property of a body by which it changes when string is under a tension. In the bulk of gases
its shape on application of force. and liquids mechanical waves are always
longitudinal e.g. sound waves in air or water. This
 Mechanical transverse waves are generated only in
is because fluids cannot sustain shear.
solids and surface of liquid.
 In solids, mechanical waves (may be sound) can be
Individual particles of the medium execute SHM about either transverse or longitudinal depending on the
their mean position in direction perpendicular to the mode of excitation.
direction of propagation of wave. The speed of the two waves in the same solid are
A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised different. (Longitudinal waves travels faster than
temporarily above the normal position of rest of transverse waves). e.g., if we struck a rod at an
particles of the medium, when a transverse wave passes. angle as shown in fig. (A) the waves in the rod will
A trough is a portion of the medium, which is be transverse while if the rod is struck at the side as
depressed temporarily below the normal position of rest shown in fig. (B) or is rubbed with a cloth the
of particles of the medium, when a transverse wave waves in the rod will be longitudinal. In case of
passes. vibrating tuning fork waves in the prongs are
transverse while in the stem are longitudinal.
1.3. Longitudinal Wave Motion
In this type of waves, oscillatory motion of the medium
particles produces regions of compression
(high pressure) and rarefaction (low pressure) which
propagated in space with time (see figure).
Fig. 13.3
Furthermore in case of seismic waves produced by
Earthquakes both S (shear) and P (pressure) waves are
Fig. 13.2 produced simultaneously which travel through the rock
NOTE: in the crust at different speeds
The regions of high particle density are called vs  5km / s while v p  9km / s  S-waves are transverse
compressions and regions of low particle density are
called rarefactions. while P  waves are longitudinal.
Some waves in nature are neither transverse nor
The propagation of sound waves in air is visualized as
longitudinal but a combination of the two. These waves
the propagation of pressure or density fluctuations. The
are called ‘ripple’ and waves on the surface of a liquid
pressure fluctuations are of the order of 1Pa, whereas
are of this type. In these waves particles of the medium
atmospheric pressure is 105 Pa.
vibrate up and down and back and forth simultaneously
1.4. Mechanical Waves in Different Media describing ellipses in a vertical plane.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 120
 Amplitude (A): Maximum displacement of

vibrating particle from its equilibrium position.
 Angular frequency   : It is defined as
2
  2 n
T
 Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all
Fig. 13.4 information related to any vibrating particle in a
wave. For equation
1.5. Characteristics of Wave Motion y  A sin  t  kx  ;  t  kx   phase.
 In wave motion, the disturbance travels through the  Angular wave number or propagation constant
medium due to repeated periodic oscillations of the 2
(k): It is defined as k 
particles of the medium about their mean positions. 
 The energy is transferred from one place to another  Wave number  v  : it is defined as
without any actual transfer of the particles of the 1 k
medium. v   number of waves in unit length of
 2
 Each particle receives disturbance a little later than the wave pattern.
its preceding particle i.e., there is a regular phase  Particle velocity, wave velocity and particle's
difference between one particle and the next. acceleration: In plane progressive harmonic wave
 The velocity with which a wave travels is different particles of the medium, usually oscillate simple
from the velocity of the particles with which they harmonically about their mean position. Therefore,
vibrate about their mean positions. all the formulae that we studied in SHM apply to
 The wave velocity remains constant in a given the particles here also.
medium while the particle velocity changes For example, maximum particle velocity is A at
continuously during its vibration about the mean mean position and it is zero at extreme positions.
position. It is maximum at mean position and zero Similarly maximum particle acceleration is  2 A
at extreme position. at extreme positions and zero at mean position.
 For the propagation of a mechanical wave, the However the wave velocity is different from the
medium must possess the properties of inertia, particle velocity. This depends on certain
elasticity and minimum friction among its particles. characteristics of the medium. Unlike the particle
velocity which oscillates simple harmonically
2. EQUATION OF PLANE PROGRESSIVE WAVE
(between  A and  A ) the wave velocity is
2.1. Important terms connected with wave motion constant for given characteristics of the medium.
 Wavelength    [length of one wave]: Distance   
Particle velocity v p and acceleration a p in a  
travelled by the wave during the time interval in sinusoidal wave: The acceleration of the particle is
which any one particle of the medium completes the second partial derivative of y  x, t  with respect
one cycle about its mean position. We may also
to t,
define wavelength as the distance between any two
nearest particles of the medium, vibrating in the  2 y  x, t 
 ap    2 A sin  t  kx    2 y  x, t 
same phase. t 2
 Frequency (n): Number of cycles (number of i.e., the acceleration of the particle equals  2
complete wavelengths) completed by a particle in times its displacement, which is the same result we
unit time. obtained for SHM. Thus, aP   2 (displacement)
 Time period (T): Time taken by wave to travel a
distance equal to one wavelength.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 121
2.2. Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave

 Particle velocity in wave motion: The individual
particles which make up the medium do not travel
through the medium with the waves. They simply
oscillate about their equilibrium positions. The
instantaneous velocity of an oscillating particle of Fig. 13.6
the medium, through which a wave is travelling, is
known as "particle velocity". Phase 0   3 2 5 3
Difference 2 2 2
  
Path 0   3  5 3
Difference 4 2 4 4 2
  
Time 0 T T 3T T 5T 3T
Difference 4 2 4 4 2
 t 
Fig. 13.5
 Wave velocity: The velocity with which the 3. TRANSVERSE WAVES ON A STRING
disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
through the medium is called wave velocity.
 Relation between particle velocity and wave   t
   
velocity: Wave equation: y  A sin  t  kx  , 2  T
y   
Particle velocity v P   A cos  t  kx  . Path difference    phase difference
t  2 
Wave velocity A transverse wave is a moving wave whose oscillations
  y are perpendicular to the direction of the wave. A simple
v   ,  Ak cos  t  kx 
T 2 k x demonstration of the wave can be created on a
1 y y 1 y horizontal length of the string by securing one end of
   the string and moving the other end up and down. Light
v t t v t
is another example of a transverse wave, where the
Particle velocity at a given position and time is equal to negative of the product
oscillations areofelectric
wave velocity with slope
and magnetic of the
fields thatwave at that poin
are at
2.3. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive right angles to the ideal light rays that describe the
Waves direction of propagation.
2 y Transverse waves commonly occur in elastic solids,

  A 2 sin t  kx  oscillations, in this case, are the displacement of solid
t 2
particles from their relaxed position, in the direction
2 y
 2   Ak 2 sin   t  kx  perpendicular to the propagation of the wave. Since
x
these displacements correspond to local shear
2 y 1 2 y deformation of the material, the transverse waves of this
 2  2 2
x v t form are known as a shear wave. In seismology, shear
2.4. Relation Between phase Difference and Path waves are also known as secondary waves or S-waves.
Difference For example: - The ripples on the surface of the water,
Electromagnetic waves, Ocean waves, etc.
The speed of a wave on a string is given by
T
v

SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 122
where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and  is Energy density: Energy per unit volume of the
mass per unit length of the string (kg/m). wave
It should be noted that v is speed of the wave w.r.t. the Pdt I
 
medium (string). svdt v
In case the tension is not uniform in the string or string 4.2. Relation Between Amplitude and Intensity of
has nonuniform linear mass density then v is speed at a wave
given point and T and  are corresponding values at For light waves, the energy of the light wave is
that point. proportional to the intensity.
E  I , where E is the energy of the wave and I is the
intensity.
2
E   Amplitude  ... 1
Also, the intensity of a wave is power transferred per
unit area.
Fig. 13.7 We know that power is energy expended per unit time.
The velocity of a wave is calculated by dividing the Therefore,
distance traveled by the time it took to travel that E
I , where A is the area of the wave and t is the
distance. For waves, this is calculated by dividing the At
 time.
wavelength by the period as follows: v 
T Therefore, we can say that.
We can take the inverse proportionality to period and I  E ...  2 
frequency and apply it to this situation as follows:
From expression (1) and (2) we can say that.
 1 2
I   Amplitude  or
v v vf
T T
Amplitude  Intensity
4.1.
4. ENERGY TRANSFER IN A STRING WAVE
Rate
of Energy, Power and Intensity of wave
t
5. LONGITUDINAL WAVES
 Energy Transferred   Pav dt
5.1. Longitudinal waves and Equation of
0
Longitudinal waves
Energy transferred in one time period  PavT
Longitudinal waves are the waves where the
This is also equal to the energy stored in one wavelength.
displacement of the medium is in the same direction as
 When a travelling wave is established on a string,
the direction of the travel of the wave.
energy is transmitted along the direction of
The distance between the centres of two consecutive
propagation of the wave, in form of potential regions of compression or the rarefaction is defined by
energy and kinetic energy wavelength  . When the compression and rarefaction
Average Power  P   2 2 f 2 A 2  v regions of two waves coincide with each other, it is
Where,  is linear mass density known as constructive interference and if the regions of
compression and rarefaction do not coincide, it is
 Intensity: Energy transferred per second per unit known as destructive interference.
cross sectional area is called intensity of the wave.
Power P 1
I   I   2 A2 v
Cross sectional area s 2
This is average intensity of the wave.
Fig. 13.8
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 123
A compression in a longitudinal wave is a region where dp   dp  max ocs  t  kx 

the particles are the closest together while rarefaction in
a longitudinal wave is a region where the paricle are  
p  p0 sin   t  kx   .....  3.2 
spread out.  2
5.2. Sound as a Pressure wave Where p  dp  variation in pressure at position x and
We can describe sound waves either in terms of excess p0  Bks0  maximum pressure variation
pressure or in terms of the longitudinal
Equation 3.2 represents that same sound wave where, P
displacement suffered by the particles of the medium
is excess pressure at position x, over and above the
w.r.t. mean position.
average atmospheric pressure and pressure amplitude
s  s0 sin   t  x / v  represents a sound wave where,
p0 is given by P0  Bks0 .....  3.3 
s = displacement of medium particle from its mean
position at x, (B = Bulk modulus of the medium, K = angular wave
s  s0 sin  t  kx  .....  3.1 number)
When sound is not propagating particles are at mean Note from equation (3.1) and (3.2) that the
position 1 and 2 displacement of a medium particle and excess pressure

at any position are out of phase by . Hence a
2
displacement maxima corresponds to a pressure minima
and vice-versa.
5.3. Speed of Sound and Laplace’s Correction
Velocity of sound waves in a linear solid medium is
Fig. 13.9 given by
When particles are displaced from mean position. Y

v ... 1

Where Y  Young’s modulus of elasticity and

  density.
Velocity of sound waves in a fluid medium (liquid or
gas) is given by
B
v ...  2 

Fig. 13.10 Where   density of the medium and B  Bulk
Change in volume  V   x  s  A  xA  sA modulus of the medium given by,
dP
V sA s B  V ...  3
  dV
V xA x Newton’s formula: Newton assumed propagation of
BV sound through a gaseous medium to be an isothermal
P   process.
V
PV  constant
Bs
P   dP  P
x  
dV V
Bds and hence B = P using equation (3) and thus he
dp  
dx obtained for velocity of sound in a gas,
dp   B   ks0  cos  t  kx  P RT
v  where M = molar mass
 M
dp  Bks0 cos  t  kx 
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 124
6. SOUND INTENSITY AND LOUDNESS on velocity of sound as long as temperature is

constant.
The density of air at 0 at pressure 76 cm of Hg column
is   1.293kg / m3 . This temperature and pressure is
Intensity of Sound Waves: Like any other progressive
called standard temperature and pressure at STP. Speed wave, sound waves also carry energy from one point of
of sound in air is 280m/s. This value is some what less space to the other. This energy can be used to do work,
than measured speed of sound in air 332m/s ten Laplace for example, forcing the eardrums to vibrate or in the
suggested the correction. extreme case of a sonic boom created by a supersonic
Laplace’s Correction: Later Lapalce established that jet, can even cause glass panes of windows to crack.
propagation of sound in a gas is not an isothermal but The amount of energy carried per unit time by a wave is
an adiabatic process and hence PV   constant called its power and power per unit area held
dP P perpendicular to the direction of energy flow is called
  
dV V intensity. For a sound wave travelling along positive x-
dP axis described by the equation.
Where, B  V   P and hence speed of sound is a
dV s  s0 sin  t  kx   
gas,
P  p0 cos  t  kx   
P  RT
v  ...  4 
 M s
  s0 cos t  kx   
Factors affecting speed of sound in atmosphere. t
(a) Effect of temperature: As temperature (T) s
increases velocity (v) increases. Instantaneous power P  F .v  pA
t
v T
P  p0 cos  t  kx    A s0 cos  t  kx   
For small change in temperature above room
temperature v increases linearly by 0.6m/s for Paverage  P 
every 1C rise in temperature.
 p0 A s0  cos 2  t  kx    
R
v  T 1/ 2
M p0 s0 A B
 v
2 
v 1 T

v 2 T B   v 2  p0  Bks0   v 2 ks0
1 v  1  p  p 2 A pAv 2 s02
v    T Paverage   p0 A  02   0 
2T  2   v k  2 v 2
v   0.6  T Maximum power
(b) Effect of pressure: The speed of sound in a gas is p02 A
 Pmax    pA v v 2p ,max  pA 2 s02
P  RT v
given by v  
 M  Av 2 s02
(c) Effect of humidity: With increase in humidity Total energy transfer  Pav  t  t
2
density decreases. This is because the molar mass
Average intensity = Average power / Area the average
of water vapour is less than the molar mass of air.
intensity at position x is given by
So at constant temperature, if P changes then 
also changes in such a way that P /  remains 1  2 s02 B P02 v
 I   .... 1
2 v 2B
constant. Hence pressure does not have any effect
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 125
Substituting B   v2 , intensity can also be expressed as In terms of decibel threshold of human hearing is 1dB
Note that intensity level  is a dimensionless quantity
7. SUPERPOSITION OF WAVES
and is not same as intensity expressed in W / m 2 .
7.1. Superposition of Waves
P02 Two or more waves can traverse the same medium
I v .....  2 
2 without affecting the motion of one another. If several
NOTE: waves propagate in a medium simultaneously, then the
resultant displacement of any particle of the medium at
1 1
If the source is a point source then I  and s0  any is instant is equal to the vector sum of the
r2 r
displacement produced by individual by wave. The
a phenomenon of intermixing of two or more waves to
and s  sin t  kr   
r produce a new wave is called Superposition of waves.
1 Therefore, according to superposition principle.
If a sound source is a line source then l  and
r The resultant displacement of a particle at any point of
1 a the medium, at any instant of time is the vector sum of
s0  and s  sin  t  kr   
r r the displacement caused to the particle by the individual
Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans: waves.
  
The ability of human to perceive intensity at different If y1 , y2 , y3 ..... are the displacement of particle at a
frequency is different. The perception of intensity is particular time due to individual waves, then the
   
maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity resultant displacement is given by y  y1  y2  y3  ....
decreases as the frequency decreases or increases from
Principle of superposition holds for all types of waves,
1000Hz.
i.e., mechanical as well as electromagnetic waves. But
For a 1000Hz tone, the smallest sound intensity that a this principle is not applicable to the waves of very
human ear can detect is 10 12 watt . / m 2 . On the other large amplitude.
hand, continuous exposure to intensities above 1W / m 2 7.2. Reflection of Waves
can result in permanent hearing loss.
Reflection of String Waves: A travelling wave, at a
The overall perception of intensity of sound to human rigid or denser boundary, is reflected with a phase
ear is called loudness. reversal but the reflection at an open boundary (rarer
medium) takes place without any phase change.
Human ear do not perceives loudness on a linear The transmitted wave is never inverted, but propagation
intensity scale rather it perceives loudness on constant k is changed.
organismic intensity scale.
For example: If intensity is increased 10 times human
ear does not perceive 10 times increase in loudness.
It roughly perceived that loudness is doubled where
intensity increased by 10 times. Hence it is prudent to
define a logarithmic scale for intensity.
Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used for
comparing two sound intensity is called decibel scale.
The intensity level  described in terms of decibels is
 I 
defined as   10log    dB 
 I0 
Here I 0 is the threshold intensity of hearing for human
ear Fig. 13.11
12 2
i.e I  10 watt / m . Amplitude of reflected and transmitted waves:
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 126
v1 and v 2 are speeds of the incident wave and reflected We get y  A sin  kx   t   
wave in mediums respectively then Where, A  A12  A22  2 A1 A2 cos  (A is amplitude of
v v 2v2 the resultant wave)
Ar  2 1 Ai , At  . Ai
v1  v2 v1  v2 A2 sin 
Also, tan   (  is phase difference of
Ar is positive if v2  v1 , i.e., wave is reflected from a A1  A2 cos 
rarer medium. the resultant wave with the first wave)
Reflection of Sound Waves: Reflection of sound Constructive and Destructive interference
waves from a rigid boundary (e.g. closed end of an Constructive Interference:
organ pipe) is analogous to reflection of a string wave
from rigid boundary; reflection accompanied by an When resultant amplitude A is maximum A  A1  A2
inversion i.e. an abrupt phase change of  . This is When cos   1 or   2 n
consistent with the requirement of displacement
amplitude to remain zero at the rigid end, since a Where n is an integer.
medium particle at the rigid end can not vibrate. As the
Destructive Interference:
excess pressure and displacement corresponding to the
same sound wave vary by  / 2 in term of phase, a When resultant amplitude A is minimum
displacement minimum at the rigid end will be a point Or A  A1  A2
of pressure maxima. This implies that the reflected
pressure wave from the rigid boundary will have same When cos   1 or    2 n  1 
phase
as the incident wave, i.e., a compression pulse is When n is an integer.
reflected as a compression pulse and a rarefaction pulse
Interference of Sound Waves:
is reflected as a rarefaction pulse.
On the other hand, reflection of sound wave from a low If p1  pm1 sin  t  kx1  1 
pressure region (like open end of an organ pipe) is
analogous to reflection of string wave from a free end. and p2  p m 2 sin  t  kx2   2 
This point corresponds to a displacement maxima, so
that the incident & reflected displacement wave at this
point must be in phase. This would imply that this point
would be a minima for pressure wave (i.e. pressure at
this point remains at its average value), and hence the
reflected pressure wave would be out of phase by 
with respect to the incident wave. i.e. a compression Fig. 13.12
pulse is reflected as a rarefaction pulse and vice-versa.
Resultant excess pressure at point O is
7.3. Interference of Waves
p  p1  p2
Interference of String Waves: Suppose two identical
sources send sinusoidal waves of same angular  p  p0 sin  t  kx   
frequency  in positive x-direction. Also, the wave
velocity and hence, the wave number k is same for the Where, p0  pm2 1  pm2 2  2 pm1 pm 2 cos  ,
two waves. One source may be situated at different
points. The two waves arriving at a point then differ in   k  x1  x2    2  1  ... 1
phase. Let the amplitudes of the two waves be A1 and
A2 and the two waves differ in phase by an angle  . (i) For constructive interference
Their equations may be written as   2n  p0  pm1  pm 2
y1  A1 sin  kx   t 
(ii) For destructive interference
And y2  A2 sin  kx   t   
   2n  1   p0  pm1  pm 2
According to the principle of superposition, the
resultant wave is represented by
y  y1  y2  A1 sin  kx   t   A2 sin  kx   t   
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 127
2 or y   2 A cos kx  sin  t.
If  is only due to path difference, then   x, and

This is the required result and from this it is clear that:
condition for constructive interference:
1. As the equation satisfies the wave equation,
x  n , n  0, 1, 2
2 y 1 2 y
Condition for destructive interference: 2

x v 2 t 2
 it represents a wave. However, as it is not of the
x   2n  1 , n  0, 1, 2
2 form f  ax  bt  , the wave is not travelling and so
From equation (1) is called standing or stationary wave.
P02  Pm21  Pm22  2Pm1  Pm 2 cos  2. The amplitude of the wave
As  2 A cos kx
Since intensity, I  (Pressure amplitude)2,
We have, for resultant intensity, Is not constant but varies periodically with position
(and not with time as om beats).
I  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 cos  .....  2
3. The points for which amplitude is minimum are
I1  I 2  I 0 called nodes and for these
 3 5
 cos kx  0, i.e., kx  , ,
I  2 I 0 1  cos    I  4 I 0 cos 2 ......  3 2 2 2
2
Hence in this case,  3 5  2 
i.e., x  , , ,.......  as k 
4 4 4   
For constructive interference:   0, 2 , 4 and
i.e., in a stationary wave, nodes are equally spaced.
I max  4 I 0
4. The points for which amplitude is maximum are
And for destructive interference:    , 3 .... and called antinodes and for these,
I min  0 cos kx  1, i.e., kx  0,  , 2 ,3 ,....
Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if the
phase difference between them does not change with  2 3  2 
i.e., x  0, , , ,......  as k 
time. In this case their resultant intensity at any point in 2 2 2   
space remains constant with time. i.e., like nodes, antinodes are also equally spaced
Two independent sources of sound are generally  
incoherent in nature, i.e. phase difference between them with spacing   and Amax  2 A
changes with time and hence the resultant intensity due 2
to them at any point in space changes with time. Furthermore, nodes and antinodes are alternate
 
with spacing   .
4
8. STANDING WAVES 5. The nodes divide the medium into segments (or
loops). All the particles in a segment vibrate in
Suppose two sine waves of equal amplitude and
frequency propagate on a long string in opposite same phase, but in opposite phase with the particles
directions. The equations of the two waves are given by in the adjacent segment. Twice in one period all the
y1  A sin  t  kx  and y2  A sin  t  kx   
particles pass through their mean position
simultaneously with maximum velocity  As  , the
These waves interfere to produce what we call standing
waves. To understand these waves, let us discuss the direction of motion being reversed after each half
special case when   0 . cycle.
The resultant displacements of the particles of the string
are given by the principle of superposition as
y  y1  y2
 A sin t  kx   sin t  kx    2 A sin t cos kx
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 128
Longitudinal Standing Waves: Two longitudinal

waves of same frequency and amplitude travelling in
opposite directions interfere to produce
a standing wave.
If the two interfering waves are given by
p1  p0 sin  t  kx 
And p2  p0 sin  t  kx   
Then the equation, of the resultant standing wave would

be given by
   
p  p1  p2  2 p0 cos  kx   sin   t  
 2  2
 
Fig. 13.13  p  p0 sin   t   ... 1
 2
6. Standing waves can be transverse or longitudinal,
e.g., in strings (under tension) if reflected wave The equation of SHM in which the amplitude p0
exists, the waves are transverse-stationary, while in depends on position as
organ pipes waves are longitudinal-stationary.  
7. As in stationary waves nodes are permanently at p0  2 p0 cos  kx   ...  2 
 2
rest, so no energy can be transmitted across them,
Points where pressure remains permanently at its
i.e., energy of one region (segment) is confined in average value; i.e. pressure amplitude is zero is called a
that region. However, this energy oscillates pressure node, and the condition for a pressure node
between elastic potential energy and kinetic energy would be given by
of the particles of the medium. When all the p0  0
particles are at their extreme positions KE is
minimum while elastic PE is maximum (as shown  
i.e., cos  kx    0
in figure A), and when all the particles  2
simultaneously) pass through their mean position
 
KE will be maximum while elastic PE minimum i.e., kx  , n  0,1, 2...  3
 2n 
2 2
(Figure B). The total energy confined in a segment
Similarly points where pressure amplitude is maximum
(elastic PE + KE), always remains the same. is called a pressure antinode and condition for a
pressure antinode would be given by
p0  2 p0
 
i.e., cos  kx    1
 2
 
or  kx    n , n  0,1, 2,...  4 
 2
Note that a pressure node in a standing wave would
correspond to a displacement antinode, and a pressure
anti-node would correspond to a displacement node.
(when we label equation (1) as SHM, what we mean is
that excess pressure at any point varies simple-
harmonically. If the sound waves were represented in
Fig. 13.14
terms of displacement waves, then the equation of
standing wave corresponding to (1) would be
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 129
   
s  s0 cos   t   where s0  2 s0 sin  kx  
 2  2
This can be easily observed to be an equation of SHM.
It represents the medium particles moving simple
harmonically about their mean position at x.
Vibration Of Air Columns: Standing waves can be set
up in air-columns trapped inside cylindrical tubes if
frequency of the tuning fork sounding the air column
matches one of the natural frequency of air columns. In
such a case the sound of the tuning fork becomes
markedly louder, and we say there is resonance between Fig. 13.16
the tuning fork and air-column. To determine the
natural frequency of the air-column, notice that there is First Overtone: Here there is one node and one
a displacement node (pressure antinode) at each closed antinode apart from the nodes and antinodes at the ends.
end of the tube as air molecules there are not free to
move, and a displacement antinode (pressure-node) at 4l 0
1  
each open end of the air-column. 3 3
In reality antinodes do not occurs exactly at the open And corresponding frequency,
end but a little distance outside. However if diameter
of tube is small compared to its length, this end v
v1   3v0
correction can be neglected 1
This frequency is 3 times the fundamental frequency
Closed organ pipe: (in the diagram, Ap  pressure
and hence is called the 3rd harmonic.
antinode, As  displacement antinode, N p  pressure nth overtone: In general, the nth overtone will have n
nodes and n antinodes between the two ends.
node, N s  displacement node). The corresponding wavelength is
4l 
n   0 and nn   2n  1 v0 ...  2 
2n  1 2n  1
th
This corresponds to the  2n  1 harmonic. Clearly
only odd harmonics are allowed in a closed pipe.
9.2 Open organ pipe :
Fig. 13.15
Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest

wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for
resonance (i.e. displacement node at left end and Fig. 13.17
antinode at right end is 0  4l , , where l  length of Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest
closed pipe the corresponding frequency. wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for
v v resonance (i.e. displacement antinodes at both ends) is,
v0   is called the fundamental frequency ... (1)
 4L 0  2l
Corresponding frequency, is called the fundamental
frequency
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 130
v v v
v0  ...  3 fc  and f 0  ...  5 
2l 4  l  0.6r  2  l  1.2 r 
9. EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF STANDING

WAVES
9.1. Sonometer
 If a vibrating Tuning fork is pressed against a
sonometer wire then forced vibrations are produced
in table of hollow box & these vibrations are
transferred to air column filled in hollow box
which results into increase in vibration amplitude
Fig. 13.18 of sound & intensity of sound increases. Air filled
st
hollow box is called sound box.
1 Overtone: Here there is one displacement antinode
 During contact with table some energy is
between the two antinodes at the ends.
transferred to table so TF cannot do vibrations for
2l  longer duration
1   1  0 and corresponding frequency
2 2  At resonance maximum energy is transferred to
v table so TF can do vibrations not for longer
v1   2v0 duration.
1
 At resonance maximum energy is transferred from
This frequency is 2 times the fundamental frequency
TF to vibrating wire and sound intensity is
and is called the 2nd harmonic.
maximum.
nth overtone: The nth overtone has n displacement
antinodes between the two antinode at the ends. Laws of Transverse Vibrations of a String:
Sonometer
2l 
n   0 and vn   n  1 v0 ...  4  The fundamental frequency of vibration of a string
n 1 n 1
fixed at both ends is given by equation. From this
th
This correspond to  n  1 harmonic: clearly both equation, one can immediately write the following
even and odd harmonics are allowed in an open pipe. statements known as "Laws of transverse vibrations of a
End correction: As mentioned earlier the displacement string".
antinode at an open end of an organ pipe lies slightly
(a) Law of Length: The fundamental frequency of
outside the open end. The distance of the antinode from
the open end is called end correction and its value is vibration of a string (fixed at both ends) is
given by e  0.6r inversely proportional to the length of the string
provided its tension and its mass per unit length
remain the same.
1
v If F and  are constants.
L
(b) Law of Tension: The fundamental frequency of a
Fig. 13.19 string is proportional to the square root of its
where r = radius of the organ pipe. with end correction, tension provided its length and the mass per unit
the fundamental frequency of a closed pipe  f c  and an length remain the same.
open organ pipe  f0  will be given by v F if L and  are constants.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 131
(c) Law of Mass: The fundamental frequency of a accurately the level corresponding to the maximum
string is inversely proportional to the square root of loudness.
the linear mass density, i.e., mass per unit length, The length of the air column is read on the scale
provided the length and the tension remain the attached. In this case, the air column vibrates in
same. resonance with the tuning fork. The minimum length of
1 the air column for which the resonance takes place
v if L and F are constants.
 corresponds to the fundamental mode of vibration. A
pressure antinode is formed at the water surface (which
9.2. Resonance Tube is the closed end of the air column) and a pressure node
Figure shows schematically the diagram of a simple is formed near the open end. In fact, the node is formed
apparatus used in laboratories to measure the speed of slightly above the open end (end correction) because of
sound in air. Along cylindrical glass tube (say about 1 the air-pressure from outside. Thus, for the first
in) is fixed on a vertical wooden frame. It is also called resonance the length l1 of the air column in the
a resonance tube. A rubber tube connects the lower end

of this glass tube to a vessel which can slide vertically resonance tube is given by l1  e  ,...  i 
4
on the same wooden frame. A meter scale is fitted
parallel to and close to the glass tube. Where d is the end correction.
Fig 13.20
The vessel contains water which also goes in the
resonance tube through the rubber tube. The level of Fig 13.21
water in the resonance tube is same as that in the vessel.
Thus, by sliding the vessel up and down, one can The length of the air column is increase to a little less
than three times of l. The water level is adjusted so that
change the water level in the resonance tube.
the loudness of the sound coming from the tube
A tuning fork (frequency 256 Hz if the tube is 1 in long) becomes maximum again. The length of the air column
is vibrated by hitting it on a rubber pad and is held near is noted on the scale. In this second resonance the air
the open end of the tube in such a way that the prongs column vibrates in the first overtone. There is one node
vibrate parallel to the length of the tube. Longitudinal and one antinode in between the ends of the column.
The length l2 of the column is given by
waves are then sent in the tube.
The water level in the tube is initially kept high. The 3
l2  e  ...  ii 
tuning fork is vibrated and kept dose to the open end, 4
and the loudness of sound coming from the tube is By (i) and (ii),
estimated. The vessel is brought down a little to 
decrease the water level in the resonance tube. The  l2  l1   , or   2  l2  l1  .
2
tuning fork is again vibrated, kept close to the open end
and the loudness of the sound coming from the tube is
estimated. The process is repeated until the water level
corresponding to the maximum loudness is located. 10. BEATS
Fine adjustments of water level are made to locate
When two sound waves of same amplitude and different
frequency superimpose, then intensity at any point in
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 132
space varies periodically with time. This effect is called (i) The frequency f1  f 2 should be less than 16Hz ,
beats.
for it to be audible.
If the equation of the two interfering sound waves (ii) Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an
emitted by s1 and s 2 at point O are, unknown frequency by sounding it together with a
source of known frequency.
11. DOPPLER’S EFFECT (iii) If the arm of a tuning fork is waxed or loaded, then
its frequency decreases.
(iv) If arm of tuning fork is filed, then its frequency
p1  p0 sin  2 f1t  k1 x1  1  increases.
The apparent change in frequency or pitch due to
p2  p0 sin  2 f 2 t  k 2 x2   2  relative motion of source and observer along the line
Let  k1 x1  1  1 and k 2 x2   2  2 of sight is called Doppler Effect. While deriving these
expressions, we make the following assumptions:
By principle of superposition (i) The velocity of the source, the observer and the
       medium are along the line joining the positions of

 2 p0 sin    f1  f 2  t  1 2  cos    f1  f 2  t  1 2  the source and the observer.
 2   2  (ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is less
than velocity of sound.
Doppler effect takes place both in sound and light. In
sound it depends on whether the source or observer or
both are in motion while in light it depends on whether
the distance between source and observer is increasing
or decreasing.
Notations:
Fig. 13.22 n  Actual frequency
i.e., the resultant sound at point O has frequency n  observed frequency (apparent frequency)
 f1  f 2 
 2  while pressure amplitude p0  t  varies with   actual wavelength
 
  observed (apparent) wavelength
   
time as p0  t   2 p0 cos   f1  f 2  t  1 2 
 2  v  velocity of sound
Hence pressure amplitude at point O varies with time vs  velocity of source
 f f  vo  velocity of observer
with a frequency of  1 2 
 2 
vw  wind velocity
Hence sound intensity will vary with a frequency
f1  f 2 Case I:
This frequency is called beat frequency  fB  and the Source in motion, observer at rest, medium at rest:
time interval between two successive intensity maxima
(or minima) is called beat time period TB 
f B  f1  f 2
1
TB  ... 1
f1  f 2
Fig. 13.23
Important Points:
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 133
Suppose the source S and observer O are separated by Observer in motion, source at rest, medium at rest:
distance v. Where v is the velocity of sound. Let n be Let the source (S) and observer (O) are in rest at their
the frequency of sound emitted by the source. Then n respective places. Then n waves given by source ‘S’
waves will be emitted by the source in one second. would be crossing observer ‘ O’ in one second and fill
These n waves will be accommodated in distance v. the space OA   v 
total distance v
So, wavelength   
total number of waves n
(1) Source moving towards stationary observer:
Let the source start moving towards the observer
with velocity vs , after one second, the n waves will
be crowded in distance  v  vs  . Now the observer Fig. 13.26
shall feel that he is listening to sound of wave 1. Observer move towards stationary source:
length  and frequency n 
Fig. 13.27
Fig. 13.24 When observer ‘O’ moves towards ‘S’ with velocity
Now apparent wavelength vo , it will cover v 0 distance in one second. So, the
total distance v  vs
   observer has received not only the n waves
total number of waves n occupying OA but also received additional number
And changed frequency, of n waves occupying the distance OO    vo  .
v v  v 
n    n  So, total waves received by observer in one second
   v  vs   v  vs 
 n  i.e., apparent frequency  n   Actual waves (n) 
 
So, as the source of sound approaches the observer Additional waves  n 
the apparent frequency n  becomes greater than be
v vo v  vo  v  vo   v
true frequency n, n     n     n 
(2) When source move away from stationary observer:
  v / n  v   
For this situation n waves will be crowded in (so, n  n )
distance v  vs .
2. Observer move away from stationary source:-
For this situation n waves will be crowded in distance
v  vo .
Fig. 13.25
v  vs
So, apparent wavelength   
n Fig. 13.28
And apparent frequency
When observer move away from source with v 0
v v  v 
n    n  velocity then he will get n waves less than real
   v  vs   v  vs 
 n  number of waves. So, total number of waves received
  by observer i.e.,
So, n  becomes less thatn n .
Case II:
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 134
Apparent frequency  n   Actual waves  n  So, when a source of sound moves away from a
stationary observer, the apparent frequency is less than
reduction in number of waves  n 
actual frequency.
v vo v  vo  v  vo   v Case IV:
n     n    
    v   n Observer in motion towards the source. Both medium
(so n  n ) and source are at rest.
Case III:  v  vo 
n    n; clearly n  n
Effect of motion of medium: General formula for a  v 
 v  v0  So, when observer is in motion towards the source, the
Doppler effect  n  n   ... i 
 v  vs  apparent frequency is more than the actual frequency.
If medium (air) is also moving with vm velocity in Case V:
direction of source and observer. Then velocity of Observer in motion away from the source. Both
sound relative to observer will be v  vm (-ve sign, if vm medium and source are at rest.
is opposite to sound velocity). So,  v  v0 
 v  vm  vo 
n    n; clearly n  n
 v 
n  n  
 v  vm  vs  So, when observer is in motion away from the source,
[on replacing v by v  vm is equal (i)] the apparent frequency is less than the actual
frequency.
NOTE:
Case VI:
When both ‘S’ and ‘O’ are in rest (i.e. vs  vo  0 ) then
Both source and observer are moving away from each
there is no effect on frequency due to motion of air. other. Medium at rest.
Case I:  v  v0 
If medium moves in a direction opposite to the direction  v  vs 
 v  vm  vo 
of propagation of sound, then n   n
 v  vm  vs 
Case II:
Source in motion towards the observer. Both medium
and observer are at rest.
 v 
 v  vs 
So, when a source of sound approaches a stationary
observer, the apparent frequency is more than the actual
frequency.
Case III:
Source in motion away from the observer. Both
medium and observer are at rest.
 v 
n    n; clearly n  n
 v  vs 
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 135
SUMMARY
1. A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space, Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive Waves
transport energy and momentum from one point to is given by:
another without the transport of matter.
2 y
  A 2 sin t  kx 
2. Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such t 2
type of medium which have shearing property, so
they are known as shear wave or S-wave 2 y
   Ak 2 sin  t  kx 
x 2
3. A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised
2 y 1 y
temporarily above the normal position of rest of  2  2
x V t
particles of the medium, when a transverse wave
passes. 12. Wave velocity: The velocity with which the
disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
4. A trough is a portion of the medium, which is
through the medium is called wave (or phase)
depressed temporarily below the normal position of
velocity
rest of particles of the medium, when a transverse
wave passes. 13. Transverse wave: A transverse wave is a moving
wave whose oscillations are perpendicular to the
5. Longitudinal Wave Motion: Longitudinal wave
direction of the wave
have oscillatory motion of the medium particles
 The speed of a wave on a string is given by
produces regions of compression (high pressure) and
rarefaction (low pressure) which propagated in space T
v
with time (see figure). 
where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and
6. The regions of high particle density are called compressions and regions of low particle density are called rarefactions.
 is mass per unit length of the string (kg/m).
7. Wavelength    [length of one wave]: Distance
14. When a travelling wave s established on a string,
travelled by the wave during the time interval in energy is transmitted along the direction of
which any one particle of the medium completes one propagation of the wave, in form of potential energy
cycle about its mean position. We may also define and kinetic energy
wavelength as the distance between any two nearest 15. Intensity of Sound Waves: The amount of energy
particle of the medium, vibrating in the same phase carried per unit time by a wave is called its power and
power per unit area held perpendicular to the
9. Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all
direction of energy flow is called intensity.
information related to any vibrating particle in a
wave. For equation 16. Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans:
y  A sin  t  kx  ;  t  kx   phase. The ability of human to perceive intensity at different
10. Wave number  v  : it is defined as frequency is different. The perception of intensity is
maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity
1 k decreases as the frequency decreases or increases
v   number of waves in unit length of the
 2 from 1000 Hz.
wave pattern. 17. Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used
11. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive for comparing two sound intensity is called decibel scale.
Waves: The intensity level  described in terms of decibels is
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 136
 I  22. Beats: When two sound waves of same amplitude

defined as   10log    dB  and different frequency superimpose, then intensity at
 I0  any point in space varies periodically with time. This
18. Superposition of Waves: The phenomenon of effect is called beats.
intermixing of two or more waves to produce a new  The frequency f1  f 2 should be less than
wave is called Superposition of waves. Therefore, 16Hz, for it to be audible.
according to superposition principle.  Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an
19. The resultant displacement of a particle at any point unknown frequency by sounding it together with
a source of known frequency.
of the medium, at any instant of time is the vector
23. Doppler’s Effect: The apparent change in frequency
sum of the displacement caused to the particle by the
or pitch due to relative motion of source and observer
individual waves.
along the line of sight is called
20. Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if Doppler Effect.
the phase difference between them does not change 24. Assumptions:
with time. In this case their resultant intensity at any
point in space remains constant with time. Two (i) The velocity of the source, the observer
independent sources of sound are generally and the medium are along the line joining the
incoherent in nature, i.e. phase difference between positions of the source and the observer.
them changes with time and hence the resultant (ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is
intensity due to them at any point in space changes less than velocity of sound.
with time.
21. Standing Wave: Standing waves can be transverse
or longitudinal, e.g., in strings (under tension) if
reflected wave exists, the waves are transverse-
stationary, while in organ pipes waves are longitudinal-
stationary.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
WAVES 137
EXERCISE – 1: BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

7. A sinusoidal travelling wave is described by
Introduction and Classification of Waves
y (x, t) = a sin (kx – t + ), where y(x, t) is the
1. The minimum distance between the two points having displacement as a function of position x and time t.
the same phase is: With reference to the above equation, match the items
(a) wavelength of the wave (b) amplitude of the wave in Column-I with terms in Column-II and choose the
(c) wave number (d) frequency of the wave correct option from the codes given below.
2. The distance travelled by the wave pattern in the time Column-I Column-I
required for one full oscillation by any constituent of (A) a denotes 1. Angular frequency of the
the medium is equal to: wave
(a) wavelength of the wave (B)  denotes 2. Angular wave number
(b) amplitude of the wave (C) k denotes 3. Amplitude of the wave
(c) wave number of the wave (D)  denotes 4. Initial phase angle at
(d) both (a) and (b) x = 0, t = 0
3. The path difference between the two waves Codes
 2 x  A B C D
y1  a1 sin   t  and
   (a) 3 2 4 1
 2 x  (b) 3 2 1 4
y2  a2 cos   t     is (c) 3 1 2 4
  
(d) 4 1 2 3
   
(a)  (b)    8. A wave equation is given by
2 2  2
  t x 1 
2   2 y  4sin      where, x is in cm and t is in
(c)    (d)     5 9 6 
  2 
seconds. The wavelength of the wave is:
4. Which of the following waves have the maximum
(a) 18 cm (b) 9 cm
wavelength?
(c) 36 cm (d) 6 cm
(a) Infrared rays (b) UV-rays
9. The equation of progressive wave is
(c) Radio waves (d) X-rays
5. Which of the following are not the transverse wave?  t x 
y  0.2sin 2    , where x and y are in
(a) sound waves in the air (b) visible light waves  0.01 0.3 
(c) X-rays (d)  - rays metres and t is in seconds. The velocity of
propagation of the wave is:
Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave (a) 30 ms
–1
(b) 40 ms
–1
–1 –1
6. The equation which represents a sinusoidal (c) 300 ms (d) 400 ms
(harmonic) wave travelling along the positive 10. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is
direction of the X-axis is:  x
y  4 sin  8t   if x and y are in centimetres,
(a) y (x, t) = a sin (kx – t + ) 2 8
(b) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t + ) then velocity of wave is
(c) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t) (a) 64 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(d) y (x, t) = a sin (t + kx) (b) 32 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(c) 32 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
(d) 64 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
WAVES 138
11. A transverse wave is described by the equation 17. A stationary boat is rocked by waves whose crests are
 x 100 m apart velocity is 25 m/s. The boat bounces up
y  y0 sin 2  ft  
  once in every:
The maximum particle velocity is equal to four times (a) 2500 s (b) 75 s
the wave velocity if (c) 4 s (d) 0.25 s
 y0  y0 18. A transverse wave passes through a string with the
(a)   (b)  
4 2 equation
(c)    y0 (d)   2 y0 y = 10 sin (0.02 x - 2.00t)
12. A progressive wave is given by where x is in meter and t in second. The maximum
 t x  velocity of the particle in wave motion is:
y  3sin 2   
 0.04 0.01  (a)100 m/s (b) 63 m/s
Where x, y are in cm and t in s. The frequency of (c)120 m/s (d) 161 m/s
wave and maximum acceleration will be Energy Transfer in a String Waves &
3 2 3 2
(a) 100 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (b) 50 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s Longitudinal Waves
4 2 4 2
(c) 25 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (d) 25 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
19. Energy is not carried by which of the following
13. Which of the following is not true for the progressive
wave?
 t x 
(a) Progressive (b) Electromagnetic
wave y  4 sin 2   
 0.02 100  (c) Transverse (d) Stationary
Where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. 20. A sings with a frequency n and B sings with a
(a) The amplitude is 4 cm 1
(b) The wavelength is 100 cm frequency that of A. If the energy remains the
8
(c) The frequency is 50 Hz
same and the amplitude of A is a then amplitude of B
(d) The velocity of propagation is 50 cm/s
is:
Transverse Waves on a String (a) 16 a (b) 8 a
14. A string of 5.5 m length has a mass 0.035 kg. If the (c) 2 a (d) a
21. When a longitudinal wave propagates through a
tension in the string is 77 N, then the speed of wave
medium, the particles of the medium execute simple
on the string is: harmonic oscillations about their mean positions.
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s These oscillations of a particle are characterized by
(c) 110 m/s (d) 164 m/s an invariant
15. A long string having mass density as 0.01 kg/m is (a) Kinetic energy
subjected to a tension of 64 N. The speed of the (b) Potential energy
transverse wave on the string is: (c) Sum of kinetic energy and potential energy
(d) Difference between kinetic energy and potential
(a) 100 m/s (b) 120 m/s
energy
(c) 80 m/s (d) 90 m/s 22. When sound propagates through air, the region of
16. Wave pulse on a string shown in figure is moving to high density of air molecules is called:
the right without changing shape. Consider two (a) compression (b) rarefaction
particles at positions x1 = 1.5 m and x2 = 2.5 m. Their (c) denser (d) none of the above
transverse velocities at the moment shown in figure 23. The speed of a longitudinal wave in air is given by:
are along directions  B
(a) v  (b) v 
B 
 (V / V )
(c) v  (d) both (a) and (c)
p
24. The relation for Bulk modulus of a medium is given
by
(a) positive y-axis and positive y-axis respectively
p V
(a) B   (b) B  
(b) negative y-axis and positive y-axis respectively V / V p / p
(c) positive y-axis and negative y-axis respectively p p
(c) B  (d) B  
(d) negative y-axis and negative y-axis respectively V / V V / V
WAVES 139
25. Distance between successive compression and 33. A wave frequency 100 Hz is sent along a string
rarefactions is 1 m and velocity of sound is 360 m/s. towards a fixed end. When this wave travels back,
Then the frequency (in Hz) of the sound is after reflection, a node is formed at a distance of
10 cm from the fixed end of the string. The speeds of
Sound Intensity and Loudness
incident (and reflected) waves are:
26. An increase in intensity level of 1 dB implies an (a) 48 m/s (b) 20 m/s
increase in Intensity of (given antilog10 0.1 = 1.2589)
(c) 10 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) 1 % (b) 3.01 %
34. When two sound waves with a phased difference of
(c) 26 % (d) 0.1 %
 / 2 , and each having amplitude A and frequency
27. If separation between screen and source is increased , are superimposed on each other, then the
by 2% what would be the effect on the intensity
maximum amplitude and frequency of resultant wave
(a) Increases by 4% (b) Increases by 2% is
(c) Decreases by 2% (d) Decreases by 4% A  A
(a) : (b) :
28. The intensity level of two sounds are 100 dB and 2 2 2
50 dB. What is the ratio of their intensities? 
(a) 10
1
(b) 10
3 (c) 2 A : (d) 2A : 
5 10
2
(c) 10 (d) 10 35. The superposition takes place between two waves of
29. A source of sound emits 200  W power which is frequency f and amplitude A. The total intensity is
uniformly distributed over a sphere of radius 10 m. directly proportional to
What is the loudness of sound on the surface of the (a) A (b) 2A
sphere? (c) 2 A 2
(d) 4 A2
(a) 70 dB (b) 74 dB
36. If two waves of same frequency and same amplitude
(c) 80 dB (d) 117 dB
respectively on superimposition produced a resultant
30. The loudness and pitch of a sound note depends on disturbance of the same amplitude, find the phase
(a) intensity and frequency difference (in degrees) between the waves:
(b) frequency and number of harmonics Standing Waves
(c) intensity and velocity
37. A standing wave consisting of 3 nodes and 2
(d) frequency and velocity antinodes is formed between the two atoms having a
31. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is distance of 1.21 Å between them. The wavelength of
20 mW. By tuning the knob of the volume control, the standing wave is:
the power of the sound is increased to 400mW. The (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
power increase in decibels as compared to the (c) 6.05 Å (d) 3.63 Å
original power is 38. A string is stretched between fixed points separated
by 75.0 cm. It is observed to have resonant
(a)13 dB (b) 10 dB
frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other
(c) 20 dB (d) 800 dB resonant frequencies between these two. Then the
Superposition of Waves lowest resonance frequency for this string is
(a) 1.05 Hz (b) 1050 Hz
32. A pulse of a wave train travels along a stretched
(c) 10.5 Hz (d) 105 Hz
string and reaches the fixed end of the string. It will
be reflected back with 39. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of
length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of an
(a) a phase change of 180° with velocity reversed
organ pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ
(b) the same phase as the incident pulse with no pipe open at both the ends is:
reversal of velocity
(a) 100 cm (b) 120 cm
(c) a phase change of 180° with no reversal of
(c) 140 cm (d) 80 cm
velocity
(d) the same phase as the incident pulse but with
velocity reversed
WAVES 140
40. Standing waves are produced in 10 m long stretched 45. Column-I has figures showing different modes of
string. If the string vibrates in 5 segments and wave oscillation of the system (a string tied at both the
velocity is 20 m/s, then its frequency will be: ends) and Column-II has name of the corresponding
(a) 5 Hz (b) 2 Hz modes. Match the items in Column I with terms in
Column II and choose the correct option from the
(c) 10 Hz (d) 2 Hz
–4
codes given below.
41. A stretched string of length 1m and mass 5 × 10 kg, Column-I Column-II
fixed at both ends, is under a tension of 20 N. If it is A. 1. Fundamental
plucked at points situated at 25 cm from one end, it mode
would vibrate with a frequency:
(a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz B. 2. Second
(c) 100 Hz (d) 256 Hz harmonic
42. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both
the ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and C. 3. Sixth
reflected wave are y1 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) y1 and harmonic
y 2 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) , respectively. The two waves D. 4. Fifth

have same wavelength ‘  ’. harmonic
The position of nodes is given as
Codes
n A B C D
(a) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (a) 4 2 3 1
(2n  1) (b) 4 3 1 2
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (c) 3 2 1 4
(c) x = n; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... (d) 2 3 1 4
(d) x = (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 46. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its
43. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both fundamental mode. The pressure variation is
the ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and maximum:
reflected wave are y1 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) and (a) at the two ends
y 2 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) , respectively. The two waves (b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends
have same wavelength ‘  ’. (c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends
The position of anti-nodes is given by the equation,
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends
 1 47. A pipe closed at one end produces a fundamental note
(a) x   n   ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
 2 2 of 412 Hz. It is cut into two equal lengths, the
n fundamental notes produced by the two pieces are
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (a) 206 Hz, 412 Hz (b) 206 Hz, 824 Hz
(2n  1) (c) 412 Hz, 824 Hz (d) 824 Hz, 1648 Hz
(c) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 48. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the
2
(d) x = (2n + 1); n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... result that the frequency of third harmonic of the
44. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both closed pipe is found to be higher by 100 Hz than
the ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and fundamental frequency of the open pipe. The
reflected wave are y1 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) and fundamental frequency of the open pipe is
(a) 200 Hz (b) 300 Hz
y 2 (x, t)  a sin(kx   t) , respectively. The two waves (c) 240 Hz (d) 480 Hz
have same wavelength ‘  ’.
The distance between any two consecutive anti-nodes
is

(a)  (b)
2
3
(c) (d) 2
2
WAVES 141
49. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with 56. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density S
frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and is stretched under a tension T. The correct relation
frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance between its fundamental frequency f, the length L and
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct the diameter D is:
option. 1 1
3 5 (a) f  (b) f 
(a) n = 3, f2 = f (b) n = 3, f2 = f LD L D
4 1 4 1
5 3 1 1
(c) n = 5, f2 = f1 (d) n = 5, f2 = f1 (c) f  2
(d) f 
4 4 D LD 2
50. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1 m and 57. A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental
velocity of sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency of 1st frequency of 600 Hz. If the length of the wire is
overtone is: doubled, the radius is halved and the wire is made to
(a) 4 (330/4) Hz (b) 3 (330/4) Hz vibrate under one-ninth the tension. Then, the
(c) 2 (330/4) Hz (d) none of these fundamental frequency will become:
51. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its (a) 400 Hz (b) 600 Hz
fundamental mode. The displacement variation is (c) 300 Hz (d) 200 Hz
maximum: 58. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
(a) at the two ends frequencies (f – 1), f, (f + 1). They superpose to give
(b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends beats. The number of beats produced per second will
(c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends be
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends (a) 4 (b) 3
52. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end (c) 2 (d) 1
resonates with sound waves of frequencies 135 Hz 59. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m
and also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity
intermediate between these two. The frequency of the 330 m/s. Number of beats per second produced is:
fundamental note is: (a) 6 (b) 12
(a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz (c) 0 (d) 1
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz 60. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20
cm wire produces 5 beats/s. The beat frequency does
53. If we study the vibration of a pipe open at both ends,
not change if the length of the wire is changed to 21
then, which of the following statement is NOT true?
cm. The frequency of the tuning fork must be:
(a) Open end will be anti-node.
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
(b) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency will
(c) 205 Hz (d) 215 Hz
be generated.
61. A source of frequency f gives 5 beats/s when sounded
(c) All harmonics of the fundamental frequency will
with a frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of
be generated.
source gives 10 beats/s when sounded with a source
(d) Pressure change will be maximum at both ends.
of frequency 420 Hz. The value of f is:
54. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
resonates with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and
(c) 205 Hz (d) 195 Hz
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency
62. When temperature increase, the frequency of a tuning
intermediate between these two. Then find the
fork
frequency (in Hz) of the first overtone:
(a) increases
Experimental Study of Standing Waves & Beats (b) decreases
55. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a (c) remains same
fundamental frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped (d) increases of decreases depending on the material
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The 63. Two wires are fixed on a sonometer. Their tensions
fundamental frequency of the air-column is now are in the ratio 8 : 1, their lengths are in the ratio 36 :
f 35, the diameters are in the ratio 4 :1 and densities are
(a) f (b)
2 in the ratio 1 : 2. If the note of the higher pitch has a
–1
3f frequency 360 s , the frequency of beats ( in Hz)
(c) (d) 2f
4 produced is
WAVES 142
Doppler's Effect of Sound 71. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies

9500 Hz and above is approaching a stationary person
64. A vehicle with a horn of frequency n is moving with a
with speed v m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 300
velocity of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the
m/s. If the person can hear frequencies up to a
straight line joining the observer and the vehicle. The
maximum of 10,000 Hz, the maximum value of v up
observer perceives the sound to have a frequency
to which he can hear the whistle is:
(n + n1). If velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s, n1
would be (a) 15 / 2 m/s (b) 15 m/s
(a) n1 = 10 n (b) n1 = 0 (c) 30 m/s (d) 15 2 m/s
(c) n1 = 0.1 n (d) n1 = – 0.1 n 72. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary
65. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of observer. The frequency of sound heard by the
frequency 680 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with observer is three times the original frequency. The
a constant velocity u. If speed of sound is 340 ms-1, velocity of sound is v m/s. The speed if source will
what should be the value of u so that he hears 10 be
beats/s?
2
(a) 2.0 ms-1 (b) 3.0 ms-1 (a) v (b) v
-1 3
(c) 2.5 ms (d) 3.5 ms-1
66. When a source is going away from a stationary 3
(c) v (d) 3v
observer with a velocity equal to velocity of sound in 2
air, then the frequency heard by the observer will be 73. A train is moving with a constant speed along a
(a) same (b) double circular track. The engine of the train emits a sound
(c) half (d) one third of frequency f. The frequency heard by the guard at
67. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a rear end of the train is
high wall at a speed of 20 ms-1, the frequency of the (a) less than f
reflected sound heard by the man sitting in the car (b) equal to f
will be nearest to; (speed of sound 330 m/s) (c) is greater than f
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz (d) may be greater than, less or equal to f depending
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz on the factors like speed of train, length of train
68. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound and radius of circular track
of frequency 5 k Hz. A passenger sitting in a moving 74. A train approaches a stationary observer, the velocity
train A records a frequency of 5.5 k Hz, while the 1
of train being of the velocity of sound. A sharp
train approaches the siren. During his return journey 20
in a different train B, he records a frequency of 6.0 k blast is blown with the whistle of the engine at equal
intervals of a second. The interval between the
Hz, while approaching the same siren. The ratio of
successive blasts as heard by the observer is:
the velocity of train B to that of train A is
1 1
(a) 242/252 (b) 2 (a) s (b) min
20 20
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6
69. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver 19 19
(c) s (d) min
sounds a horn of frequency f. The reflected sound 20 20
heard by the driver has a frequency 2 f. If v be the 75. Two trains, each moving with a velocity of 30 m/s,
cross each other. One of the trains gives a whistle
velocity of sound, then the velocity of the car, in the
whose frequency is 600 Hz. If the speed of sound is
same velocity units would be 330 m/s, then the apparent frequency (in Hz) for
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 passengers sitting in the other train before crossing
(c) v/ 2 (d) v/3 would be:
70. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is
moving with uniform velocity of 36 km/h towards a
tall building which reflects the sound waves. The
speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the
siren heard by the car driver is:
(a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
(c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
WAVES 143
EXERCISE – 2: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

Questions marked with asterisk (*) are 8. The mass per unit length of a uniform wire is
0.135 g/cm. A transverse wave of the form
deleted from JEE Main y = –0.21 sin (x + 30t) is produced in it, where x is in
1. Which of the following equations represents a meter and t is in second. Then, the expected value of
travelling wave? [2021] tension in the wire is x × 10–2 N. N. Value of x is
(a) y  A sin 15 x  2t  (b) y  Ae  x  vt   
2
………
(Round-off to the nearest integer) [2021]
(c) y  Ae x cos t    (d) y  A sin x cos t
9. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ
2. A student is performing the experiment of resonance pipe contain gases of densities ρ1 and ρ2 respectively.
column. The diameter of the column tube is 6 cm.
The compressibility of gases is equal in both the
The frequency of the tuning fork is 504 Hz. Speed of
the sound at the given temperature is 336 m/s. The pipes. Both the pipes are vibrating in their first
zero of the meter scale coincides with the top end of overtone with same frequency. The length of the open
the resonance column tube. The reading of the water x 
level in the column when the first resonance occurs pipe is L 1 where x is ……… (Round off to the
is: [2021]
3 2
(a) 18.4 cm (b) 13 cm Nearest Integer) [2021]
(c) 14.8 cm (d) 16.6 cm 10. A transverse wave is represented by y  2 sin  t  kx 
3. A tuning fork A of unknown frequency produces
5 beats/s with a fork of known frequency 340 Hz. cm. The value of wavelength (in cm) for which the
When fork A is filed, the beat frequency decreases to wave velocity becomes equal to the maximum particle
2 beats/s. What is the frequency of fork A? [2021] velocity, will be
(a) 338 Hz (b) 335 Hz (JEE Main 2022)
(c) 345 Hz (d) 342 Hz (a) 4 (b) 2
4. A sound wave of frequency 245 Hz travels with the
(c)  (d) 2
speed of 300m / s along the positive x – axis. Each
point of the wave moves to and fro through a total 2
11. In the wave equation y  0.5sin  400t  x  m the
distance of 6 cm. What will be the mathematical 
expression of this travelling wave? [2021] velocity of the wave will be : (JEE Main 2022)
 3

(a) Y  x, t   0.03 sin 5.1x  0.2 10 t  (a) 200 m/s (b) 200 2 m/s
(b) Y  x, t   0.06 sin 5.1x  1.5 10  t 
3
(c) 400 m/s (d) 400 2 m/s
12. Sound travels in a mixture of two moles of helium and
(c) Y  x, t   0.06 sin 0.8x   0.5 10  t 
3
n moles of hydrogen. If rms speed of gas molecules in
(d) Y  x, t   0.03 sin 5.1x  1.5 10  t 
3 the mixture is 2 times the speed of sound, then the
value of n will be (JEE Main 2022)
5 *. Two cars are approaching each other at an equal (a) 1 (b) 2
speed of 7.2 km/hr. When they see each other, both (c) 3 (d) 4
blow horn having frequency of 676 Hz. The beat 13. The equations of two waves are given by
y1  5sin 2  x  vt  cm
frequency heard by each driver will be ……… Hz.
[Velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s.] [2021] y2  3sin 2  x  vt  1.5  cm
6. A signal of 0.1 kW is transmitted in a cable. The These waves are simultaneously passing through a
attenuation of cable is –5 dB per km and cable length string. The amplitude of the resulting wave is
is 20 km. The power received at receiver is 10–x W. (JEE Main 2022)
The value of x is ……… (a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm
(c) 5.8 cm (d) 8 cm
P  14. The displacement of simple harmonic oscillator after 3
[Gain in dB = 10log10  0  ] [2021]
 Pi  seconds starting from its mean position is equal to half
of its amplitude. The time period of harmonic motion
7. The percentage increase in the speed of transverse is (JEE Main 2022)
waves produced in a stretched string if the tension is (a) 6s (b) 8s
increased by 4%. Will be ……… %. [2021] (c) 12s (d) 36s
WAVES 144
Questions marked with asterisk (*) are Young's modulus is 1.2 × 1011 Nm–2. The extension of
the wire over its natural length due to its tension will
be x  10 5 m. The value of x is_______.
15*. An observer moves towards a stationary source of
(JEE Main 2022)
sound with a velocity equal to one-fifth of the velocity
23*. An observer is riding on a bicycle and moving towards
of sound. The percentage change in the frequency will
a hill at 18 kmh–1. He hears a sound from a source at
be (JEE Main 2022)
some distance behind him directly as well as after its
(a) 20% (b) 10%
reflection from the hill. If the original frequency of the
(c) 5% (d) 0%
sound as emitted by source is 640 Hz and velocity of
16*. A sinusoidal wave 
y  t   40sin 10  106  t  is the sound in air is 320 m/s, the beat frequency between
amplitude modulated by another sinusoidal wave the two sounds heard by observer will be _____ Hz.
x  t   20 sin 1000 t  . The amplitude of minimum (JEE Main 2022)
24. Two waves executing simple harmonic motion
frequency component of modulated signal is:
travelling in the same direction with same amplitude
(JEE Main 2022)
and frequency are superimposed. The resultant
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.25
amplitude is equal to the times of amplitude of
(c) 20 (d) 10
individual motions. The phase difference between the
17. The equation of a particle executing simple harmonic
two motions is ________ (degree)
 1
motion is given by x  sin   t   m . At t = 1s, the (JEE Main 2022)
 3 25. True travelling waves of equal amplitudes and equal
speed of particle will be (Given:  = 3.14). frequencies move in opposite directions along a string.
(JEE Main 2022) They interfere to produce a stationary wave whose
(a) 0 cm s–1 (b) 157 cm s–1
(c) 272 cm s–1 (d) 314 cm s–1  2 t 
equation is given by y   10 cos  x sin  cm. The
18. In an experiment to determine the velocity of sound in  T 
air at room temperature using a resonance tube. the 4
first resonance is observed then the air column has a amplitude of the particle at x  cm will be ___ cm.
3
length of 20.0 cm for a tuning fork of frequency 400 (JEE Main 2022)
Hz is used. The velocity of the sound at room 26. The first overtone frequency of an open organ pipe is
temperature is 336 ms–1. The third resonance is equal to the fundamental frequency of a closed organ
observed when the air column has a length of cm pipe. If the length of the closed organ pipe is 20 cm.
(JEE Main 2022) The length of the open organ pipe is _______ cm.
19*. When a car is approaching the observer, the frequency (JEE Main 2022)
of horn is 100 Hz. After passing the observer, it is 27. A set of 20 turning forks is arranged in a series of
50Hz. If the observer moves with the car, the increasing frequencies. If each fork gives 4 beats with
respect to the preceding fork and the frequency of the
x
frequency will be Hz where x = _____ last fork is twice the frequency of the first, then the
3 frequency of last fork is _____ Hz.
(JEE Main 2022) (JEE Main 2022)
20. A wire of length 30 cm, stretched between rigid 28. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz resonates in the
supports, has it’s nth and (n + 1)th harmonics at 400 Hz fundamental mode with an air column of length 125
and 450 Hz, respectively. If tension in the string is cm in a cylindrical tube closed at one end. When water
2700 N, it’s linear mass density is……..kg/m. is slowly poured in it, the minimum height of water
required for observing resonance once again is cm.
(JEE Main 2022)
(Velocity of sound in air is 340 ms–1)
21*. The frequency of echo will be _________ Hz if the (JEE Main 2022)
train blowing a whistle of frequency 320 Hz is moving 29. A travelling wave is described by the equation
with a velocity of 36 km/h towards a hill from which
y  x, t    0.05sin 8 x  4t  m . The velocity of the
an echo is heard by the train driver. Velocity of sound
in air is 330 m/s. (JEE Main 2022) wave is : [all the quantities are in SI unit]
22. The speed of a transverse wave passing through a (JEE Main 2023)
string of length 50 cm and mass 10 g is 60 ms–1. The (a) 4 ms 1 (b) 2 ms 1
area of cross-section of the wire is 2.0 m m2 and its (c) 0.5 ms 1 (d) 8 ms 1
WAVES 145

deleted from JEE Main 37. A guitar string of length 90 cm vibrates with a
30*. A person observes two moving trains, ‘A’ reaching the fundamental frequency of 120 Hz . The length of the
station and ‘B’ leaving the station with equal speed of string producing a fundamental frequency of 180 Hz
30 m/s. If both trains emit sounds with frequency 300 will be _________ cm . (JEE Main 2023)
Hz, (Speed of sound : 330 m/s) approximate difference 38. A transverse harmonic wave on a string is given by
of frequencies heard by the person will be :
y  x, t   5sin  6t  0.003 x 
(JEE Main 2023)
(a) 33 Hz (b) 55 Hz where x and y are in cm and t in sec. The wave
(c) 80 Hz (d) 10 Hz velocity is ________ ms 1 . (JEE Main 2023)
31. A steel wire with mass per unit length 7.0  10 3 kg m 1 39. The equation of wave is given by
is under tension of 70 N. The speed of transverse  
Y  102 sin2 160t  0.5x  
waves in the wire will be: (JEE Main 2023)  4
(a) 200 m / s (b) 100 m / s where x and Y are in m and t in s . The speed of
(c) 10 m / s (d) 50 m / s the wave is ________ km h 1 . (JEE Main 2023)
32*. The engine of a train moving with speed 10ms 1 40. A wire of density 8  103 kg / m 3 is stretched between
towards a platform sounds a whistle at frequency 400
two clamps 0.5 m apart. The extension developed in
Hz. The frequency heard by a passenger inside the
train is: (neglect air speed. Speed of sound in air the wire is 3.2 104 m . If Y  8 1010 N / m 2 , the
fundamental frequency of vibration in the wire will be
 330 ms 1 ) (JEE Main 2023)
_________ Hz . (JEE Main 2023)
(a) 400 Hz (b) 388 Hz
41. For a certain organ pipe, the first three resonance
(c) 412 Hz (d) 200 Hz
frequencies are in the ratio of 1: 3 : 5 respectively. If
33*. A car P travelling at 20ms sounds its horn at a
1
the frequency of fifth harmonic is 405 Hz and the
frequency of 400 Hz. Another car Q is travelling
speed of sound in air is 324 ms –1 the length of the
behind the first car in the same direction with a
organ pipe is ______ m (JEE Main 2023)
velocity 40 ms 1 . The frequency heard by the
42. The fundamental frequency of vibration of a string
passenger of the car Q is approximately [Take, velocity
stretched between two rigid support is 50 Hz . The
of sound  360 ms 1 ] (JEE Main 2023)
mass of the string is 18 g and its linear mass density is
(a) 485 Hz (b) 471 Hz
(c) 514 Hz (d) 421 Hz 20 g / m . The speed of the transverse waves so
34. The distance between two consecutive points with produced in the string is ___________ ms 1
phase difference of 60 in a wave of frequency 500 (JEE Main 2023)
Hz is 6.0 m. The velocity with which wave is traveling 43. In an experiment with sonometer when a mass of
is _______ km / s (JEE Main 2023) 180 g is attached to the string, it vibrates with
35*. A person driving car at a constant speed of 15 m / s is fundamental frequency of 30 Hz . When a mass m is
approaching a vertical wall. The person notices a attached, the string vibrates with fundamental
change of 40 Hz in the frequency of his car's horn frequency of 50 Hz . The value of m is ___________
upon reflection from the wall. The frequency of horn is g. (JEE Main 2023)
__________ Hz .
(Given: Speed of sound : 330 m / s )
(JEE Main 2023)
36. An organ pipe 40 cm long is open at both ends. The
speed of sound in air is 360 ms 1 . The frequency of the
second harmonic is ______ Hz .
(JEE Main 2023)
WAVES 146
EXERCISE – 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. Transverse waves are produced in a long string by
attaching its free end to a vibrating tuning fork.
1. The amplitude of a wave disturbance propagating
1 Figure below shows the shape of a part of string.
along positive x-axis is given by y  at t = 0 Which pairs of points are in phase?
1 x2
1
and y  at t = 2 s where x and y are in
1  ( x  1) 2
metres. The shape of the wave disturbance does not
change with time. The velocity of the wave is
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(a) A and D (b) B and E
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 m/s
(c) C and F (d) A and G
2. The distance between two consecutive crests in a
7. When a wave travels in a medium, the particle
wave train produced in string is 5 cm. If two complete
displacements are given by
waves pass through any point per second, the velocity
y (x, t) = 0.03 sin  (2t – 0.01 x) where y and x are
of the wave is
in meters and t in seconds.
(a) 10 cm/s (b) 2.5 cm/s
The wave length of the wave is
(c) 5 cm/s (d) 15 cm/s
(a) 10 m (b) 20 m
3. A equation of plane progressive wave
(c) 100 m (d) 200 m
y = A sin (  t + kx). Its wrong statement is
8. Transverse wave of amplitude 10 cm is generated at
2 one end (x = 0) of a long string by a tuning fork of
(a) is wavelength
k frequency 500 Hz. At a certain instant of time, the
 displacement of a particle A at x = 100 cm is - 5 cm
(b) is velocity of wave
k and of particle B at x = 200 cm is + 5 cm. What is the
 wave length of the wave?
(c) is frequency of wave
2 (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
k (c) 4 m (d) 5 m
(d) is maximum velocity of particle 9. A source of sound vibrates according to the equation

4. An equation of plane progressive wave y = 0.05 cos  t. It sends out waves of velocity 1.5
a 2  x  m/s. The wave length of the waves is
y  sin  t   . If maximum velocity of particle (a) 1.5 m (b) 3.0 m
 3  b
(c) 4.5 m (d) 6.0 m
and velocity of wave are equal.
10. A progressive wave in a medium is represented by the
a
Now will be  5 
b equation y  0.1sin 10  t   x  where y and x
 11 
2 3 are in cm and t in seconds. The maximum speed of a
(a) (b)
3 2 particle of the medium due to the wave is
1 (a) 1 cm s
–1
(b) 10 cm s
–1
(c) (d) none of these
2 (c)  cms
–1
(d) 10  cms
–1
5. A transverse wave is represented by the equation

5  x
2 11. The equation of wave y  sin  t   where
y  y0 sin (vt  x) for what value of  , the 2  2

displacement is in cm and time in sec. The phase
maximum particle velocity is equal to two times the
angle between two particles at distance 12 cm is
wave velocity? o
(a) 6 (b) 6 radian
 y0 o
(a)   (b) y0 (c) 3 (d) 3 radian
2
2 y0
(c) = 2y0 (d)  
2
WAVES 147
12. The particle displacement in a travelling harmonic 20. Two periodic waves of amplitudes a and b pass
wave is given by through a region at the same time and in the same
y (x, t) = 2.0 cos2(10t – 0.008x + 0.35) where x and y direction. If a > b, the difference in the maximum and
are in centimetres and t is in seconds. What is the minimum possible amplitudes is:
phase difference between oscillatory motion at two (a) a + b (b) a – b
points separated by a distance of 4 m? (c) 2 a (d) 2 b
(a) 0.2  (b) 6.4  21. The extension in a string, obeying Hooke’s law, is x.
(c) 0.6  (d) 0.8  The speed of the wave in the stretched string is v. If
13. Transverse waves of the same frequency are the extension in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the
generated in two steel wires A and B. The diameter of speed of the wave in the string will be
A is twice that of B and the tension in A is half that in (a) 1.22 v (b) 0.61 v
B. The ratio of the velocities of waves in A and B is (c) 1.50 v (d) 0.75 v
22. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 hangs from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse
wave to travel the full length of the rope is (g = 9.8
(c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 3 : 2 2 2
m/s )
14. The velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s. If the air
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
consists of nitrogen and oxygen in the ratio 4 : 1, the
(c) 3 s (d) 4 s
velocity of sound in oxygen is –8 –2
23. A sound has an intensity of 2 × 10 Wm . Its
(a) 372 m/s (b) 278 m/s
intensity level in decibels is: (log10 2 = 0.3)
(c) 418 m/s (d) 315 m/s
(a) 23 (b) 4.3
15. The speed of sound in oxygen ( O2 ) at a certain
(c) 43 (d) none of these
temperature is 460 ms 1 . The speed of sound in 24. Two waves represented by the following equations
helium (He) at the same temperature will be (assume are travelling in the same medium
both gases to be ideal) y1 = 5 sin 2 (75t – 0.25 x),
–1 –1
(a) 330 ms (b) 460 ms y2 = 10 sin 2 (150 t – 0.50 x)
–1 –1
(c) 500 ms (d) 1420 ms I1
16. The speed of sound in a gas is v and the root mean The intensity ratio of the two waves is:
I2
square speed of gas molecules is vrmsIf the ratio of
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
the specific heats of the gas  = 1.5, then the ratio of
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16
speed of sound to vrms is 25. The intensity level of a sound wave is 4dB. If the
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 intensity of the wave is doubled, then the intensity
level of the sound, as expressed in dB, would be:
(c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 3
(a) 8 (b) 16
17. Under the same conditions of pressure and
(c) 7 (d) 14
temperature, the velocity of sound in oxygen and
26. Two sound waves of the same frequency have
hydrogen gases are v0 and vH then:
respective amplitudes of 3 units and 1 unit and are
(a) vH = 2v0 (b) vH = 4v0 travelling in opposite directions in the same straight
(c) v0 = 4vH (d) vH = v0 line. At a particular place in that line, the resultant
18. If the temperature of the gaseous medium drops by wave will vary in loudness. The ratio of maximum
1%, the velocity of sound in that medium: loudness to minimum loudness is:
(a) increase by 5% (b) remains unchanged (a) 9/1 (b) 6/1
(c) decreases by 0.5% (d) decreases by 2% (c) 9/2 (d) 2/1
19. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous 27. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20
medium of molecular weight M at 0°C: dB. The intensity decreases by a factor of
R 3R (a) 100 (b) 1000
(a) (b) (c) 10000 (d) 10
M M
382 R 273 R
(c) (d)
M M
WAVES 148
2
28. Two sounds waves have intensities 100W/m and 33. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest
2
400W/m respectively. The later sound is mode of vibration for which a point at quarter of its
(a) 6 decibel louder than the other length from one end is a point of maximum
(b) 4 decibel louder than the other displacement. The frequency of vibration in this mode
(c) 0.6 decibel louder than the other is 100 Hz. What will be the frequency emitted when it
(d) data is not sufficient vibrates in the next mode such that this point is again
29. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is a point of maximum displacement?
20 mW. By turning the knob of the volume control, (a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz
the power of the sound is increased to 400 mW. The (c) 600 Hz (d) 300 Hz
power increase in decibels as compared to the original 34. A string is stretched between fixed points separated
power is by 75 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies
(a) 13.0 dB (b) 10 dB of 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant
(c) 20 dB (d) 8000 dB frequencies between these two. Then, the lowest
30. A wave is incident on fixed target as resonant frequency for this string is
 x (a) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz
y  5sin 2  t   , the equation of reflected wave (c) 1.05 Hz (d) 1050 Hz
 2
35. Two stretched strings of same material are vibrating
through rigid target
under the same tension in fundamental mode. The
 x  x ratio of their frequencies is 1 : 2 and ratio of the
(a) y = –5 sin 2  t   (b) y = +5 sin 2  t  
 2  2 length of the vibrating segments is 1 : 4. Then the
 x  x ratio of the radii of the strings is :
(c) y = +5 sin 2  t   (d) y = –5 sin 2  t  
 2   2 (a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
31. Two loudspeakers A and B, 1.0 m apart, produce (c) 3 : 2 (d) 8 : 1
sound waves of the same wavelength and in the same 36. A string of length 1 m has the mass per unit length
–1
phase. A sensitive sound detector, moving along PQ, 0.1 g cm . What would be the fundamental frequency
parallel to line AB, 2.4 m away, detects maximum of vibrating of this string under tension of 400 N?
sound at P (on the perpendicular bisector of AB) and (a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz
another maximum sound when it first reaches Q (c) 50 Hz (d) 200 Hz
directly opposite to B, as shown in Figure. What is 37. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the
the wavelength of sound emitted by the speakers? same material are stretched on a sonometer wire. If
the ratio of their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16, then the
ratio of their fundamental frequencies are :
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4
38. The fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is
600 Hz when length of wire is short by 25%. Now
st
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.2 m frequency of 1 overtone will be
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m (a) 800 Hz (b) 1200 Hz
32. Two waves are passing through a region in the same (c) 1600 Hz (d) 2000 Hz
direction at the same time. If the equation of these 39. The length of sonometer wire is 1.8 m. What is
waves are: wavelength of wave when number of nodes are 10
2 (a) 20 cm (b) 36 cm
y1  a sin  vt  x  (c) 40 cm (d) 72 cm

40. The total length of a sonometer wire between fixed
2
y2  b sin  vt  x   x0  ends is 110 cm. Two bridges are placed to divide the
  length of wire in ratio 6 : 3 : 2. The tension in the
 wire is 400 N and the mass per unit length is 0.01
then the amplitude of the resultant wave for x0  ,
2 kg/m. What is the minimum common frequency with
is:
which three parts can vibrate?
(a) | a – b | (b) (a + b)
(a) 1100 Hz (b) 100 Hz
(c) zero (d) a 2  b2 (c) 166 Hz (d) 1000 Hz
WAVES 149
41. Figure shows a stationary wave between two fixed (c) 8.1 cm (d) 10.8 cm
point P and Q. Which point(s) of 1,2 and 3 are in 49. A pipe of length 20 cm is open at both ends. Which
phase with the point X? harmonic mode of the pipe is resonantly excited by a
–1
1700 Hz source? The speed of sound = 340 ms .
(a) First harmonic (b) Second harmonic
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only (c) Third harmonic (d) Fourth harmonic
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 3 only 50. A knife–edge divides a sonometer wire into two parts.
42. Particle displacements (in cm) in a standing wave are The fundamental frequencies of the two parts are f1
given by y (x, t) = 2 sin (0.1  x) cos (100  t).
and f2. The fundamental frequency of the sonometer
The distance between a node and the next anti–node
wire when the knife–edge is removed will be
is
1
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5.0 cm (a) f1 + f2 (b) ( f1  f 2 )
(c) 7.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm 2
43. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable f f
(c) f1 f 2 (d) 1 2
knife–edge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 f1  f 2
beat per second when sounded together. If the total 51. A tube closed at one end containing air, produces,
length of the wire is 100 cm, the frequencies of the when excited, the fundamental note of frequency
two parts of the wire are 512 Hz. If the tube is open at both ends, the
(a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz fundamental frequency that can be excited is (in Hz)
(c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz (a) 1024 (b) 512
44. An organ pipe closed at one end is excited to support (c) 256 (d) 128
the third overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has 52. An organ pipe P1, closed at one end vibrating in its
(a) 3 nodes and 3 antinodes first harmonic and another pipe P2, open at both ends
(b) 3 nodes and 4 antinodes vibrating in its third harmonic, are in resonance with a
(c) 4 nodes and 3 antinodes given tuning fork. The ratio of the lengths of P1 and P2
(d) 4 nodes and 4 antinodes
is
45. Two organ pipes A and B are closed and open
respectively. Third overtone of each are unison. The 8 1
(a) (b)
ratio of their length is 3 6
(a) 8/7 (b) 7/8 1 1
(c) (d)
(c) 7/4 (d) 4/7 2 3
46. The fundamental frequency of open organ pipe is f 53. Two closed pipes produce 10 beats/s when emitting
when it filled with one–fourth length with water now their fundamental nodes. If their length are in ratio of
frequency will be 25 : 26. Then their fundamental frequency in Hz, are :
f (a) 270, 280 (b) 260, 270
(a) f (b)
3 (c) 260, 250 (d) 260, 280
2f 4f 54. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded together,
(c) (d) x beats/sec are heard. Frequency of A is n. Now,
3 3
when one prong of fork B is loaded with a little wax,
47. Two organ pipes, each closed at one end, give 5 beats
the number of beats decreases. The frequency of fork
per second when emitting their fundamental notes. If
B is:
their lengths are in the ratio of 50:51, their
(a) n + x (b) n – x
fundamental frequencies (in Hz) are
(c) n + 2x (d) n – 2x
(a) 250, 255 (b) 255, 260
55. A tuning fork of frequency 100 when sound together
(c) 260, 265 (d) 265, 270
with another tuning fork of unknown frequency
48. Standing waves are produced by the superposition of
produces 2 beats/s. On loading the tuning fork whose
two waves y1 = 0.05 sin (3t – 2x) and
frequency is not known and sounded together with the
y2 = 0.05 sin (3t + 2x) where x and y are expressed in same tuning fork produces one beat, then the
metres and t is in seconds. What is the amplitude of a frequency of the unknown tuning fork is:
0
particle at x = 0.5 m. Given cos (57.3 ) = 0.54 (a) 102 (b) 98
(a) 2.7 cm (b) 5.4 cm (c) 99 (d) 101
WAVES 150
56. An organ pipe, open from both ends produces 5 62. A motorcycle starts from rest and accelerates along a
2
beats/s when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 straight line at 2.2 m/s . At the starting point of the
Hz in its fundamental mode. The second harmonic of motorcycle, there is a stationary electric siren. How
the same pipe produces 10 beats/s with a source of far has the motorcycle gone when the driver hears the
frequency 420 Hz. The fundamental frequency of frequency of the siren at 90% of its value when the
pipe is: motorcycle was at rest?
(a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz (Speed of sound in air = 330 ms-1)
(c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz (a) 123.75 m (b) 247.5 m
57. A metal wire of diameter 1 mm is held on two knife (c) 495 m (d) 990 m
edges separated by a distance of 50 cm. The tension 63. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is
in the wire is 100 N. The wire vibrating with its tied to a string of 1.5 m length and rotated with an
fundamental frequency and a vibrating tuning fork angular velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane.
together produce 5 beats per second. The tension in Then the range of frequencies heard by an observer
the wire is then reduced to 81 N. When the two are stationed at a large distance from the whistle will be
excited, beats are heard at the same rate. What is the (Speed of sound v = 330 m/s)
frequency of the fork? (a) 400.0 Hz to 484.0 Hz (b) 403.3 Hz to 480.0 Hz
(a) 90 Hz (b) 95 Hz (c) 400.0 Hz to 480.0 Hz (d) 403.3 Hz to 484.0 Hz
(c) 100 Hz (d) 105 Hz 64. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a
58. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same high wall at a speed of 20 m/s. If the speed of sound
length produce 2 beats when they are set into –1
is 340 m/s , the frequency of the reflected sound
vibrations simultaneously in their fundamental mode. heard by the man sitting in the car will be nearest to
The length of open organ pipe is now halved and of
closed organ pipe is doubled. The number of beats (a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
produced will be: (c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz
(a) 8 (b) 7
(c) 4 (d) 2 Objective Questions II
59. A train standing at a certain distance from a railway [One or more than one correct option]
platform is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. If 65. A bat flying above a lake emits ultrasonic sound of
the speed of sound is 340 ms-1, the frequency and 100 kHz. When this wave falls on the water surface, it
wavelength of the sound of the whistle heard by a is partly reflected and partly transmitted. The speed of
man running towards the engine with a speed of 10 –1
sound in air is 340 ms and in water 1450m/s, Then:
ms-1 respectively are (a) wavelength of sound in air is 6.8 mm
(a) 500 Hz, 0.7 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) wavelength of sound in air is 3.4 mm
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (c) wavelength of sound in water is 14.5 mm
60. In the above question a wind starts blowing in the (d) wavelength of sound in water is 1.45 mm
direction from the engine to the platform with a speed 66. When two sound waves with a phase difference of
of 10 ms-1. The frequency and wavelength of the 
sound of the whistle heard by a man standing at the , and each having amplitude A and frequency ,
2
platform will be
are superimposed on each other, Then:
(a) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.7m
A
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (a) the maximum amplitude is
61. A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant 2
velocity u away from the observer on the ground. The (b) frequency of resultant wave is 
ratio of the actual frequency of the whistle to that (c) the maximum amplitude is 2A
measured by the observer is found to be 1.2. If the

train is at rest and the observer moves away from it at (d) frequency of resultant wave is
2
the same velocity, the ratio would be given by
(a) 0.51 (b) 1.25
(c) 1.52 (d) 2.05
WAVES 151
67. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. Where 72. A wave moves at a constant speed along a stretched
should the two bridges be placed from A, to divide string. Mark the incorrect statement out of the
the wire in 3 segments whose fundamental following:
frequencies are in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 3? (a) Particle speed is constant and equal to the wave
(a) 30 cm (b) 60 cm speed.
(c) 90 cm (d) 80 cm (b) Particle speed is independent of amplitude of the
68. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is sounded above periodic motion of the source.
a cylindrical tube 1 m high. Water is slowly poured (c) Particle speed is independent of frequency of
–1
into the tube. If the speed of sound is 340 ms , at periodic motion of the source.
what levels of water in the tube will the sound of the (d) Particle speed is dependent on tension and linear
fork be appreciably intensified? mass density the string.
(a) 25 cm (b) 75cm 73. An observer A is moving directly towards a stationary
(c) 20cm (d) 100cm sound source while another observer B is moving
69. Two whistles A and B have frequencies 660 Hz and away from the source with the same velocity. Which
590 Hz respectively. An observer is standing in the of the following statements are correct?
middle of line joining the two sources. Source B and (a) Average of frequencies recorded by A and B is
observer are moving towards right with velocity 30 equal to natural frequency of the source.
m/s and A is standing to the left side. If the velocity (b) Wavelength of wave received by A is less than
of sound in air is 300 m/s. Then: that of waves received by B.
(a) beat frequency is 6Hz (c) Wavelength of waves received by two observers
(b) beat frequency is 4Hz will be same.
(c) apparent wavelength for B is 0.45 (d) Both the observers will observe the wave
(d) apparent wavelength for B is 45m travelling with same speed.
70. A wave equation which gives the displacement along
Numerical Value Type Questions
Y-direction is given by
y  104 [sin (60t  20 x)] 74. A string has a mass 10 g and a length L = 3 m. Its two
ends are tied to two walls at a distance D = 2 m apart.
where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds.
Two blocks of mass M = 2 kg each are suspended
This represents a wave
from the string as shown in figure. In what time in
(a) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative
milliseconds will a wave pulse sent from a point A,
x-direction
reach point B?
(b) of wavelength  metres
(c) of frequency 30/ Hertz 3g
(given:  3)
–4
(d) of amplitude 10 m travelling along the negative 2 2
D
x-direction.
71. For a transverse wave on a string, the string L/4 L/4
displacement is described by L/2
y = (x, t) = f(x – at) A B
where f represents a function and a is a negative
constant. Then which of the following is/are correct
statement(s)? M M
(a) Shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f(x)
(b) The shape of wave form does not change as it
moves along the string
(c) Wave form moves in +ve x-direction
(d) The speed of waveform is a
WAVES 152
75. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same y2 = a sin 2008 t
length. Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a The number of beats (in Hz) heard per second is:
monoatomic gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at 83. A tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz produces 10
one end and closed at the other end, and is filled with beat/s, when sounded with a vibrating sonometer
a diatomic gas of molar mass MB. Both gases are at
string. What must be frequency (in Hz) of the string,
the same temperature. If the frequency of the second
if a slight increase in tension produces more beats per
harmonic of the fundamental mode in pipe A is equal
to the frequency of the third harmonic of the sec, then before?
MA Assertion & Reason
fundamental mode in pipe B, if the value of is
MB
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are true and reason
100n is the correct explanation of the assertion.
, find the value of n.
63 (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but reason
76. A “pop” gun consists of a tube 25 cm long closed at is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
one end by a cork and at the other end by a tightly (C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
(D) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
fitted piston. The piston is pushed slowly in. When
the pressure rises to one and half times the 84. Assertion: Both transverse and longitudinal
atmospheric pressure, the cork is violently blown out. mechanical waves can propagate in solids but only
longitudinal mechanical waves can propagate in
Calculate the frequency of the “pop” caused by its
gases.
ejection. Reason: Gases cannot withstand a shearing stress;
(v = 340 m/s) hence they have only bulk modulus. Choose the
77. A weight is attached to the free end of a sonometer correct statement from the following.
wire. It gives resonance at a length 40 cm when it is (a) A (b) B
in resonance with a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. (c) C (d) D
The weight is then immersed wholly in water, the 85. Assertion: Compression and rarefaction involve
resonant length is reduced to 30 cm. The relative changes in density and pressure.
16 Reason: When particles are compressed, density of
density in which weight suspended is , find the medium increases and when they are rarefied, density
n
value of n of medium decreases.
78. Two tuning forks A and B produce 10 beats per (a) A (b) B
second when sounded together. On slightly loading (c) C (d) D
fork A with a little wax, it was observed that 15 beats 86. Assertion: The phase difference between two
medium particles having a path difference  is 2  .
are heard per second. If the frequency of fork B is 480
Reason: The phase difference is directly proportional
Hz, what is the frequency (in Hz) of fork A before it
to path difference of a particle.
was loaded?
(a) A (b) B
79. Nine tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing
(c) C (d) D
frequency. Each tuning fork produces 4 beats per
87. Assertion: Sound would travel faster on a hot
second when sounded with either of its neighbours. If summer day than on a cold winter day.
the frequency of the 9th tuning fork is twice that of Reason: Velocity of sound is directly proportional to
the first, what is the frequency (in Hz) of the first the square of its absolute temperature.
tuning fork? (a) A (b) B
80. A tuning fork produces 4 beats per second when (c) C (d) D
sounded with a sonometer of vibrating length 48 cm. 88. Assertion: Where two vibrating tuning forks having
It produces 4 beats per second also when the vibrating frequencies 256 Hz and 512 Hz are held near each
length is 50 cm. What is the frequency (in Hz) of the other, beats cannot be heard.
tuning fork? Reason: The principle of superposition is valid only
81. 1 = 100 cm, 2 = 99 cm and velocity of sound if the frequencies of the oscillators are nearly equal.
= 396 m/s. The number of beats (in Hz) is:
82. Following two wave trains are approaching each (a) A (b) B
other: (c) C (d) D
y1 = a sin 2000 t
WAVES 153
93. What is the displacement of the particle of the string

Match the Following at x = 50 cm at time t = 0.05 s?
Each question has two columns. Four options are given
1
representing matching of elements from Column-I and (a) cm (b) 2cm
2
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option 3 2
corresponding to the correct matching. (c) cm (d) cm
2 3
89. Match the column
Column–I Column–II
94. What is the velocity of this particle at this instant?
(a) Wave in solids (p) Transverse only
(b) Electromagnetic (q) Can be transverse (a) 10 2  cm/ s (b) 40 2  cm/s
waves or longitudinal
(c) Longitudinal (r) Require a medium (c) 30 2  cm / s (d) 20 2  cm / s
waves to propagate
(d) Pressure waves (s) Elastic parameters Use the following passage, solve Q. 95 to Q. 97
dependent Passage – 2
90. Match the column:
For the travelling wave A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/hr sounds a
y = 0.02 sin 2 (10t – 5x), (all in SI units) whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it is at a distance of 1 km
Column–I Column–II
from the hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/hr is blowing in
(a) Speed of wave (p) 10
(b) Frequency of (q) 0.4  the direction of motion of train.
wave Velocity of sound = 1200 km/hr.
(c) Wavelength of (r) 2
95. Find the frequency of the whistle as heard by an
wave
(d) Maximum particle (s) 0.2 observer on the hill
speed (a) 599.33 Hz (b) 590.33 Hz
Paragraph Type Questions (c) 582.30 Hz (d) 370.22 Hz
Use the following passage, solve Q. 91 to Q. 94 96. What is the distance from the hill at which the echo
Passage – 1 from the hill is heard by the driver?
A long string having a cross-sectional area 0.80 mm2 and 15 20
(a) km (b) km
density 12.5 g/cm3 is subjected to a tension of 64 N along 16 31
the x-axis. One end (at x = 0) of this string is attached to a
vibrator moving in transverse direction at a frequency of 20 17 29
(c) km (d) km
Hz. 18 30
At, t = 0, the source is at a maximum displacement y = 97. What is the frequency heard by the driver?
1.0cm.
(a) 620 Hz (b) 630 Hz
91. Find the speed of the wave travelling on the string.
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 m/s (c) 650 Hz (d) 640 Hz
(c) 80 m/s (d) 40 m/s
92. Write the equation for the wave.
–1 –1
(a) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 s ) t – {(/2m ) x}]
–1 –1
(b) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 s ) t + {(/2m ) x}]
–1 –1
(c) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 s ) t – {(/4m ) x}]
–1 –1
(d) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 s )t + {(/4m )x}]
WAVES 154
Use the following passage, solve Q. 98 to Q. 100 100. In a detective system, the apparent frequency found
Passage – 3 with the source moving with a speed u = 0.8v is f1 and
RADAR is the acronym of radio detection and ranging. the source being at rest and the RADAR moving with
A radar detects an enemy aircraft by the use of radio-waves u = 0.9v is f2, then
which are received after reflection. In analogy with plane (a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 > f2
mirror reflection, one can take the reflected wave to be 8
coming from a virtual source. If the reflector is moving with (c) f1 < f2 (d) f 2  f1
9
a speed u, the speed of source relative the receiver can be 2u.
Even when this kind of motion exist with the source and to
the receiver, Doppler’s effect can be applied. According to
Doppler’s effect as a source and an observer are approaching
each other, the apparent frequency f’, of a signal of
frequency f is,
 v  v0 
f ' f  
 v  vs 
Using the elaborated idea solve the following questions:
98. If an aircraft is approaching a given radar with a
speed u, the apparent frequency of f, received by the
radar will be [v – velocity of electromagnetic wave]
 v   v 
(a) f   (b) f  
 v u   v u 
 v   v 
(c) f   (d) f  
vu   v  2u 
99. The apparent decrease in frequency, if the air-craft
moves away is
2u u
(a) f (b) f
v v
u 2uf
(c) f (d)
2v v  2u
WAVES 155
EXERCISE – 4: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork 5. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ
forming standing waves with five antinodes between pipe contain gases of densities 1 and 2 respectively.
the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended The compressibility of gases are equal in both the
from the wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. pipes. Both the pipes are vibrating in their first
The wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming overtone with same frequency. The length of the open
three antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. organ pipe is
The value of M is: [2002] [2004]
(a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg L 4L
(c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg (a) (b)
3 3
2. In the experiment for the determination of the speed
of sound in air using the resonance column method, 4L 1 4L 2
(c) (d)
the length of the air column that resonates in the 3 2 3 1
fundamental mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1 m. When 6. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with
this length is changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and
resonates with the first overtone. Calculate the end frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance
correction. [2003]
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct
(a) 0.012 m (b) 0.025 m
option. [2005]
(c) 0.05 m (d) 0.024 m
3. A police car moving at 22 m/s chases a motorcyclist.
3 5
(a) n  3, f 2  f1 (b) n  3, f 2  f1
The police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while both 4 4
of them move towards a stationary siren of frequency 5 3
(c) n  5, f 2  f1 (d) n  5, f 2  f1
165 Hz. Calculate the speed of the motorcycle. If it is 4 4
given that the motorcyclist does not observe any beats 7. A tuning fork of 512 Hz is used to produce resonance
(speed of sound = 330 m/s) [2004] in a resonance tube experiment. The level of water at
first resonance is 30.7 cm and at second resonance is
63.2 cm. The error in calculating velocity of sound is:
[2005]
(a) 204.1 cm/s (b) 110 cm/s
(c) 58 cm/s (d) 280 cm/s
8. A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical
(a) 33 m/s (b) 22 m/s massless strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block
(c) zero (d) 11 m/s of mass m is suspended from point P such that BP is
4. A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed equal to x. If the fundamental frequency of the left
inside water. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s wire is twice the fundamental frequency of right wire,
and in air it is 300 m/s. The frequency of sound then the value of x is: [2006]
recorded by an observer who is standing in air is
[2004]
(a) 200 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
(c) 120 Hz (d) 600 Hz
(a) l/5 (b) l/4

(c) 4l/5 (d) 3l/4
WAVES 156
Paragraph Type Questions 13. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle
Use the following passage, solve Q. 9 to Q. 11 as observed by the passengers in train A is best
Passage - 1 represented by [2007]
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the (a)
equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (0.5 x – 100 t)
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46 x – 92 t)
(All parameters are in MKS)
9. How many times does an observer hear maximum
intensity in one second? [2006]
(a) 4 (b) 10 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 6 (d) 8 (b)
10. What is the speed of the sound?
[2006]
(a) 200 m/s (b) 180 m/s
(c) 192 m/s (d) 96 m/s
11. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is
zero in one second? [2006]
f1 f2 Frequency
(a) 192 (b) 48
(c)
(c) 100 (d) 96
Use the following passage, solve Q. 12 to Q. 14
Passage - 2
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s and
30 m/s respectively in the same direction on the same
straight track, with B ahead of A. The engines are at the f1 f2 Frequency
front ends. The engine of train A blows a long whistle. (d)
f1 f2 Frequency f1 f2 Frequency
Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed of 14. The spread of frequency as observed by the
components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 Hz to passengers in train B is
f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The spread in the [2007]
(a) 310 Hz (b) 330 Hz
frequency (highest frequency–lowest frequency) is thus
(c) 350 Hz (d) 290 Hz
320 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
12. The speed of sound of the whistle is [2007]
(a) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(b) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(c) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for
passengers in B
(d) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains
WAVES 157
15. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in 18. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed
the positive x–direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The at both the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N.
wavelength of the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is
The string is set into vibration using an external
10 cm. At a particular time t, the snap-shot of the
wave is shown in figure. The velocity of point P when vibrator of frequency 100 Hz. Find the separation (in
its displacement is 5 cm is: [2008] cm) between the successive nodes on the string.
[2009]
19. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed
frequency f0, which is reflected by two cars
approaching the source. The difference between the
frequencies of sound reflected from the cars is 1.2%
of f0. What is the difference in the speeds of the cars
3 ˆ 3 ˆ
(a) jm/s (b)  jm/s
50 50 (in km per hour) to the nearest integer? The cars are
3 ˆ 3 ˆ moving at constant speeds much smaller than the
(c) i m/s (d)  im/s
50 50 speed of sound which is 330 ms .
–1
[2009]
16. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T
20. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t) and
resonates with a mode corresponding to the first
overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length  
y2 = 3 sin  2 x  6t   are superimposed, the
75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also  2
generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a tuning
fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the amplitude of the resultant wave is [2010]
string is slightly increased the number of beats 21. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. At
reduces to 2 per second. Assuming the velocity of its open end a 0.5 m long uniform string is vibrating
sound in air to be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the
in its second harmonic and it resonates with the
tuning fork in Hz is: [2008]
(a) 344 (b) 336 fundamental frequency of the pipe. If the tension in
(c) 117.3 (d) 109.3 the wire is 50 N and the speed of sound is 320 ms ,
–1
17. A student performed the experiment to measure the

the mass of the string is: [2010]
speed of sound in air using resonance air-column
method. Two resonances in the air-column were (a) 5 g (b) 10 g
obtained by lowering the water level. The resonance (c) 20 g (d) 40
with the shorter air-column is the first resonance and
22. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is
that with the longer air column is the second
resonance. Then, [2009] moving with uniform velocity 36 km/h towards a tall
(e) the intensity of the sound heard at the first building which reflects the sound waves. The speed
resonance was more than that at the second
of sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren
resonance
(f) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a heard by the car driver is [2011]
horizontal plane above the resonance tube (a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
(g) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the (c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
prongs is typically around 1 cm
(h) the length of the air–column at the first resonance
was somewhat shorter than l/4th of the wavelength
of the sound in air
WAVES 158
23. Column-I show four systems, each of the same (d) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe,
length L, for producing standing waves. The lowest if the other end of the pipe is closed.
possible natural frequency of a system is called its 26. A student is performing an experiment using a
fundamental frequency, whose wavelength is denoted resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency
as f Match each system with statements given in 244 s-1. He is told that the air in the tube has been
Column-II describing the nature and wavelength of replaced by another gas (assume that the column
the standing waves. [2011] remains filled with the gas). If the minimum height at
Column-I Column-II which resonance occurs is (0.350  0.005) m, the gas
(A) Pipe closed at one (p) Longitudinal in the tube is
end waves (Useful information: 167 RT  640 J 1/ 2 mole 1/ 2 ;
140 RT  590 J 1/ 2 mole 1/ 2 . The molar masses M in
grams are given in the options. Take the values of
O L 10
for each gas as given there.) [2014]
(B) Pipe open at both (q) Transverse M
ends waves 10 7
(a) Neon (M = 20,  )
20 10
10 3
O L (b) Nitrogen (M = 28,  )
28 5
(C) Stretched wire (r) f = L
clamped at both ends 10 9
(c) Oxygen (M = 32,  )
32 16
O L 10 17
(d) Argon (M = 36,  )
(D) Stretched wire (s) f = 2L 36 32
27. One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x axis
clamped at both ends
is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string
and at mid-point is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in
the y direction so that stationary waves are set up in
O L the string. The possible waveform (s) of these
L/2 stationary waves is (are) [2014]
(t) f = 4L
x 50 t
(a) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
24. A student is performing the experiment of resonance
column. The diameter of the column tube is 4 cm.  x 100 t
(b) y (t) = A sin cos
The frequency of the tuning fork is 512 Hz. The air 3 3
temperature is 38°C in which the speed of sound is 5 x 250 t
(c) y (t) = A sin cos
336 m/s. The zero of the meter scale coincides with 6 3
the top end of the resonance column tube. When the 5 x
(d) y (t) = A sin cos 250 t
first resonance occurs, the reading of the water level 2
in the column is [2012] 28. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one
(a) 14.0 cm (b) 15.2 cm mole of hydrogen and one mole of helium in
(c) 16.4 cm (d) 17.6 cm equilibrium at temperature T. Assuming the gases are
ideal, the correct statement (s) is (are) [2015]
25. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a
(a) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is
result, a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the 2RT
pipe. When this pulse reaches the other end of the (b) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to
pipe, [2012] that in helium gas is 6 / 5
(a) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, (c) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
if the other end of the pipe is open. 1
(b) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, of hydrogen molecules is
2
if the other end of the pipe is open (d) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
(c) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, 1
of hydrogen molecules is
if the other end of the pipe is closed 2
WAVES 159
29. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal 32. A train S1, moving with a uniform velocity of 108
  km/h, approaches another train S2 standing on a
intensities I0 have phases angles  and  . platform. An observer O moves with a uniform
 
When they are superposed, the intensity of the velocity of 36 km/h towards S2, as shown in figure.
resulting wave is nI0 .The value of n is. [2015] Both the trains are blowing whistles of same
frequency 120 Hz. When O is 600 m away from S2
30. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart
and distance between S1 and S2 is 800 m, the number
and emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz and 121 Hz,
of beats heard by O is ……… (Speed of the sound =
respectively. A car is initially at a point P, 1800 m
330) [2019]
away from the midpoint Q of the line MN and moves
towards Q constantly at 60 km/hr along the
perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses Q and
eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q.
Let v(t) represent the beat frequency measured by a
person sitting in the car at time t. Let fP, fQ and fR be
the beat frequencies measured at locations P, Q and
R, respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1.
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true
33. A musical instrument is made using four different
regarding the sound heard by the person? [2016]
metal strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length
(a) The plot below represents schematically the
 , 2  , 3 and 4  respectively. The instrument is
variation of beat frequency with time
played by vibrating the strings by varying the free
length in between the range L0 and 2L0. It is found
that in string 1(  ) at free length L0 and tension T0
the fundamental mode frequency is f0. [2019]
List-I List-II
(b) The plot below represents schematically the (I) String-1 (  ) (P) 1
variation of beat frequency with time (II) String-2 (2  ) (Q) 1
2
(III) String-3 (2  ) (R) 1
2
(IV) String-4 (4  ) (S) 1
3
(T) 3
(c) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum 16
when the car passes through Q (U) 1
(d) fP + fR = 2 fQ
31. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line 16
in the same direction. The man in front walks at a The length of the strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are kept fixed at
speed 1.0 ms-1 and the man behind walks at a speed 3L 5 L 7L
L0, 0 , 0 and 0 , respectively. Strings 1, 2, 3 and
2.0 ms-1. A third man is standing at a height 12 m 2 4 4
above the same horizontal line such that all three men 4 are vibrated at their 1st, 3rd, 5th and 14th
are in a vertical plane. The two walking men are harmonics, respectively such that all the strings have
blowing identical whistles which emit a sound of same frequency. The correct match for the tension in
frequency 1430 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 330 the four strings in the units of T0 will be:
ms-1. At the instant, when the moving men are 10 m (a) I  P, II  R, III  T, IV  U
apart, the stationary man is equidistant from them. (b) I  P, II  Q, III  R, IV  T
The frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary (c) I  P, II  Q, III  T, IV  U
man at this instant, is ……… [2018] (d) I  T, II  Q, III  R, IV  U
WAVES 160
34. A stationary tuning fork is in resonance with an air

column in a pipe. If the tuning fork is moved with a
speed of 2 ms-1 in front of the open end of the pipe
and parallel to it, the length of the pipe should be
changed for the resonance to occur with the moving
tuning fork. If the speed of sound in air is 320 ms-1,
the smallest value of the percentage change required
in the length of the pipe is ………… [2020]
35. A source, approaching with speed u towards the open
end of a stationary pipe of length L, is emitting a When only S 2 is emitting sound and it is Q , the
sound of frequency f s . The farther end of the pipe is frequency of sound measured by the detector in Hz is
closed. The speed of sound in air is v and f 0 is the _____ [2023]
fundamental frequency of the pipe. For which of the 38. S1 and S1 are identical sound sources of frequency
following combination(s) of u and fs will the sound 656 Hz. The source S1 is located at O and S 2 moves
reaching the pipe lead to a resonance? [2021] anti-clockwise with a uniform speed 4 2 ms 1 on a
(a) u=0.8 v and f s  f 0 circular path around O, as shown in the figure. There
(b) u=0.8 v and f s  2 f 0 are three points P, Q and R on this path such that P
(c) u=0.8 v and f s  0.5 f 0 and R are diametrically opposite while Q is
(d) u=0.5 v and f s  1.5 f 0 equidistant from them. A sound detector is placed at
36. 3
A string of length 1 m and mass 2  10 kg is under point P . The source S1 can move along direction
tension T. When the string vibrates, two successive OP .
harmonics are found to occur at frequencies 750 Hz [Given: The speed of sound in air is 324 ms-1]
and 1000 Hz. The value of tension T is _____
Newton. [2023]
Use the following passage, solve Q. 37 and Q. 38
Passage - 3
37. S1 and S1 are identical sound sources of frequency
656 Hz. The source S1 is located at O and S 2 moves
anti-clockwise with a uniform speed 4 2 ms 1 on a
circular path around O, as shown in the figure. There Consider both sources emitting sound. When S 2 is at
are three points P, Q and R on this path such that P
R and S1 approaches the detector with a speed
and R are diametrically opposite while Q is
4 ms1 , the beat frequency measured by the detector
equidistant from them. A sound detector is placed at
is ______ Hz. [2023]
point P . The source S1 can move along direction
OP .
[Given: The speed of sound in air is 324 ms-1]
WAVES 161
WAVES
ANSWER KEY 162
Answer Key
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c) 5. (d) 6. (2.00) 7. (32.00) 8. (c)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (a)
13. (a) 14. (1.00) 15. (100.00) 13. (100) 14. (25.00) 15. (06.00) 16. (2.00)
16. (160.00) 17. (1.00) 18. (0.50) 17. (25.00) 18. (2.00) 19. (30.00) 20. (d)
19. (9.00) 20. (9.00) 21. (5.00) 22. (b) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (d)
23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (c) 25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (b)
27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (8.00) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (5.00)
31. (0.32) 32. (0.10) 33. (d) 34. (a) 33. (1.00) 34. (25.00) 35. (11.00) 36. (4.00)
35. (b) 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b) 37. (20.00) 38. (2.00) 39. (40.00)
39. (a) 40. (d) 41. (5.00) 42. (6.00)
43. (20.00) 44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (d)
47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (8.76)
51. (5.00) 52. (1.25) 53. (2)
54. (34.64)55. (0.10)
ANSWER KEY 163
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

EXERCISE - 3: EXERCISE - 4:
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a,b) 4. (2.00)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (2.4)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a,d)

13. (a, d) 14. (a,d) 15. (a,b,d) 16. (a,b,c)
17. (a,c,d) 18. 2 19. 32.00 20. (a)
21. (a)
22. (A  Q,S);(B  P, R);(C  P, Q, R,S);(D  P, Q, R,S)
23. (d) 24. (a,c) 25. (b)

ANSWER KEY 164
Answer Key
CHAPTER -11 FLUID MECHANICS
EXERCISE - 1 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 81. (d) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (b)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (6.00) 8. (b) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c)
89. (d) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
97. (a) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (b)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a)
101. (b) 102. (d) 103. (d) 104. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 105. (d)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (a)

33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c)
49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (10.00) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (0.10) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (a)
ANSWER KEY 165
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a)

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a)
5.(25600.00) 6. (3.00) 7. (b) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (c) 9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c)
12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (363)
16. (24.00) 17. (20.00) 18. (2.00) 19. (11.00) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c)
20. (4.00) 21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
24. (b) 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b)
28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (7.00)
32. (1.00) 33. (25.00) 34. (2.00) 35. (10.00) 25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d)
36. (80.00) 37. (264.00) 38. (4.00) 39. (1150)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (d) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d)
37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a)
49. (b) 50. (a,d) 51. (a) 52. (a,b,d)
53. (b,c) 54. (a,c,d) 55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (b,c)
57. (b,d) 58. (a,b,c) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (a)
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (a,b) 64. (b,d)
65. (a,c) 66. (c) 67. (50) 68. (25)
69. (100.4) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (d)
75. (AR); (B  Q);(C  P);(D  S)
ANSWER KEY 166

EXERCISE - 4:
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1.(d) 2.(d) 3. ((a) zero (b) 0.25 cm (c) g/6)
 dR 5 
4. (a) 5. (ga/2y) 6. (2m) 7.  r 
 dt 
  2 L2 
8.  H   9.(a) 10.(c)
 2g 
5
11.(a) 12.(a) 13.(1.01 × 10 Pa)
14.(b) 15.(6.00) 16.(6.00) 17.(c)
18.(a) 19.(b) 20.(d) 21.(c)
22.(c) 23.(a) 24.(b,c) 25.(a,d)
26.(3.00) 27.(a,c) 28.(a),(c),(d)
29.(a,d) 30.(150.00) 31.(9.00)
32.(004.00) 33.(a,c) 34.(0.30)
35.(10.00) 36.(c,d) 37.(25)
38.(90.80) 39.(30)
ANSWER KEY 167
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 1.(a) 2.(d) 3.(b) 4. (c)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5.(c) 6.(d) 7.(a) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (a) 9.(a) 10.(b) 11.(c) 12. (c)
13. (d) 14. (0.62) 15. (a) 16. (d) 13.(d) 14.(c) 15.(3.00) 16.(7.00)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (c) 17.(2.00) 18.(6.00) 19. (c) 20. (b)
21. (10) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (a) 21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (100) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (2.00)
29. (c) 30.(c) 31. (c) 32. (c) 29. (16.00) 30. (2.00) 31. (5.00) 32. (1.00)
33.(c) 34.(a) 35.(b) 36. (b) 33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (b) 36. (c)
37.(a) 38.(b) 39.(b) 40. (d) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)
41.(d) 42.(c) 43. (c) 44. (1.5) 41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (d)
45.(b) 46.(c) 47.(a) 48. (c) 45. (b) 46. (5.00) 47. (1.00)
49.(b) 50.(d) 51. (b) 52. (d) 48. (120.00) 49. (40.00) 50. (8.00) 51. (88.00)
53. (b) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (d) 52. (20.00) 53. (2.00) 54. (50.00) 55. (99)
57. (a) 58.(d) 59.(a) 60. (d) 56. (20) 57. (4)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63.(a) 64. (a)
65. (b) 66.(d) 67.(c) 68. (a)
69. (a) 70. (c) 71.(d) 72. (c)
ANSWER KEY 168
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (0) 7. (b,d)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a) 8. (a–p; b–q, r; c–p; d–q, s)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 9.(a–p or p, s; b–q, s or q, r, s; c–s; d–q)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a) 10.(d) 11.(c) 12.(d) 13.(4.00)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 14.(a) 15.(b) 16.(a,d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (b) 17.(a,d) 18.(b,d) 19.(a,b,d) 20.(d)
29. (a) 30.(d) 31. (b) 32. (c) 21.(d) 22.(6.00) 23.(10)
33. (a) 34.(a) 35.(c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(d) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (a)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(a) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50.(c) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54.(a) 55.(c) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58.(a) 59.(d) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(d) 64. (d)
65. (d) 66.(d) 67. (d) 68. (a,c)
69. (a,c) 70. (b,c) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (b,c,d) 73. (c) 74.(d) 75. (2.00)
76. (5.00) 77. (6.00) 78. (2.00) 79. (0.5)
80. (50) 81. (45) 82. (1.00) 83. (2)
84. (d) 85.(d) 86.(c) 87. (b)
88. (a-p; b-s; c-r; d-q) 89.(a-q; b-s; c-p; d-r)
90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (b) 93. (b)
94. (c) 95.(b) 96.(b) 97. (c)
98. (c) 99.(c) 100.(d)
ANSWER KEY 169
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1.(a) 2.(c) 3.(b) 4. (d)

5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5.(8.00) 6.(8.00) 7.(2.00) 8.(1215)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9.(4.00) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (d)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b) 17. (b) 18. (104.00) 19. (200.00) 20. (3.00)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 21. (340.00) 22. (15.00) 23. (20.00) 24. (60.00)
25. (180) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 25. (5.00) 26. (80.00) 27. (152.00) 28. (50.00)
29. (d) 30.(a) 31. (a) 32. (a) 29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34.(d) 35.(d) 36. (120) 33. (d) 34. (18.00) 35. (420) 36. (900)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(b) 40. (a) 37. (60) 38. (20) 39. (1152) 40. (80)
41. (1) 42. (90) 43. (500)
41. (b) 42.(a) 43.(a) 44. (b)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(d) 48. (a)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (a) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54.(45) 55.(a) 56. (a)
57. (d) 58.(c) 59.(a) 60. (c)
61. (c) 62.(b) 63.(10) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66.(c) 67. (c) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(a) 71. (b) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74.(c) 75. (720)
ANSWER KEY 170
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (a,d) 18. (5.00) 19. (7.00) 20. (5.00)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (a)
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (a) 23. (A – p, t; B – p, s; C – q, s; D – q, r)
29. (a) 30.(a) 31. (b) 32. (a) 24. (b) 25. (b,d) 26. (d)
33. (d) 34.(b) 35.(d) 36. (b) 27. (a,c,d) 28.(a,b,d) 29.(3.00) 30.(a,b,c)
37. (d) 38.(c) 39.(c) 40. (d) 31.(5.00) 32.(8.13) 33.(c) 34.(0.62 to
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (d) 0.63)
45. (b) 46.(d) 47.(a) 48. (b) 35.(a,d) 36.(5) 37.(648) 38.(8.2)
49. (b) 50.(d) 51. (a) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54.(a) 55.(a) 56. (b)
57. (b) 58.(b) 59.(d) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(d) 64. (c)
65. (b,c) 66.(b,c) 67. (b,c) 68. (a,b)
69. (b,c) 70. (c,d) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (a,b,c,d) 73. (a,c) 74. (50)
75. (4.00) 76. (510) 77. (7.00) 78. (470)
79. (32) 80.(196) 81. (4.00) 82. (4.00)
83. (490) 84.(a) 85.(a) 86. (b)
87. (c) 88.(c)
89. (a-q; b - p; c - r, s; d - r)
90. (a - r; b - p; c - s; d - q)
91. (c) 92. (a) 93.(a) 94. (d)
95. (a) 96.(d) 97. (a) 98. (d)
99. (a) 100.(c)

XI-JEE M-3 Physics Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

XI-JEE M-3 Physics Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XI-JEE M-3 Physics Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vedantu’s

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 16

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 21

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 25

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 29

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 162

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 45

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 55

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 59

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 70

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 164

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 87

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 94

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 100

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 111

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 167

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 118

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 137

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 143

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 146

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 155

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 169

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 1.2 Important Points on Elastic Behaviour of Solids

1.4 Deforming Force and Restoring Force

 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body

2.2 Types of Stress 2.4 Types of Strain

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

3.2 Poisson’s Ratio

We know elastic energy stored per unit volume

5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH (d) If the stress is increased further,

 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum

 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of

 Stress-strain curve for different materials.

Ductile material Aim

Y can be calculated as the values of L and r are known and

6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

and elongation d produced in this differential element is

Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.

1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY

According to various types of stresses, we have 1

Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of stress

1 2 6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

(a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

25. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and

36. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length  by

38. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5

R 3 P02 x (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum

obeyed m. The wire is suspended from 5.22 m high ceiling of a

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

38. The length of a wire becomes l1 and l2 when 100 N and

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Reason : The Young’s modulus for small strain is,

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011